2006 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. © manual will be replaced with a hyperlinked due to changes in content and specifications of the This document does not contain hype rlinks and may be formatted for prin version at the en eil hthappen vehicle that fthe model year. d of Owner’s Manual throughout the model year. This This year. model the throughout ting instead of web us. This is ting instead of web us. This 2006 TSX (Unlinked) P/N 31SEA620 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０５：５８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０００１
Owner’s Identification
OWNER This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This Owner’s Manual covers all models of ADDRESS theTSX.Youmayfinddescriptionsof STREET equipment and features that are not on your particular model.
The information and specifications included CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ in this publication were in effect at the time POSTAL CODE of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., V. I. N. Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and DELIVERY DATE without incurring any obligation whatsoever. (Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ POSTAL CODE OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０６：０５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０００２
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2006 Acura TSX was a wise investment. As you read this manual, you will It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by a symbol. This One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to information is intended to help you read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment. youcanrefertoitatanytime. California Proposition 65 Warning Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights WARNING: This product contains and responsibilities. or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the and birth defects or other instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves reproductive harm. your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique Event Data Recorders to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns. This vehicle is equipped with one or more recording devices commonly referred to as event data recorders or sensing and diagnostic modules.
i ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０６：１６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０００３
AFewWordsAboutSafety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, is very important. And operating this including: vehicle safely is an important responsibility. Safety Labels － on the vehicle. Safety Messages － preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of To help you make informed three signal words:DANGER , WARNING , or CAUTION . decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean: provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY this manual. This information alerts HURT if you don’t follow instructions. you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions. Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow hazards associated with operating or instructions. maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgement. Safety Headings － such as Important Safety Reminders or Important Safety Precautions. Safety Section － such as Driver and Passenger Safety. Instructions － how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information－ please read it carefully.
ii ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０６：２５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０００４
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ...... 4
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ...... 7
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column) ...... 59
Features (climate, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink and other convenience items) ...... 159
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)...... 227
Driving (engine and transmission operation)...... 239
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)...... 263
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses)...... 311
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controls)...... 335
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only)(warranty and contact information)...... 349
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ...... 353
Index ...... I INDEX
Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures) ...... last page
1 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０６：２８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０００５
2 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０６：４６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０００６
Overview of Contents
Contents Before Driving Technical Information A convenient reference to the What gasoline to use, how to break- ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, sections in this manual. in your new vehicle, and how to load and technical information. luggage and other cargo. Your Vehicle at a Glance Warranty and Customer A quick reference to the main Driving Relations controls in your vehicle. The proper way to start the engine, (U.S. and Canada only) shift the transmission, and park; plus A summary of the warranties Driver and Passenger Safety what you need to know if you’re covering your new vehicle, and how Important information about the planning to tow a trailer. to contact us for any reason. Refer to proper use and care of your vehicle’s your warranty manual for detailed seat belts, an overview of the Maintenance information. supplemental restraint system (SRS), The maintenance minder shows you and valuable information on how to when you need to take your vehicle Authorized Manuals protect children with child restraints. to the dealer for maintenance service. (U.S. only) There is also a list of things to check How to order manuals and other Instruments and Controls and instructions on how to check technical literature. Explains the purpose of each them. instrument panel indicator and gauge, Index and how to use the controls on the Taking Care of the Unexpected dashboard and steering column. This section covers several problems Service Information Summary motorists sometimes experience, A summary of the information you Features and details how to handle them. need when you pull up to the fuel How to operate the climate control pump. system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
3 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０６：５４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０００７
Your Vehicle at a Glance
DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG(P.11, 28) INSTRUMENT PANEL (P.61) PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG (P.11, 28) DRIVING POSITION GAUGES(P.68) MEMORY SYSTEM (P.142) AUDIO SYSTEM (P.170) MIRROR CONTROLS (P.146)
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH (P.128) MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH (P.129) POWER WINDOW SWITCHES (P.147) CLIMATE CONTROL HOOD RELEASE SYSTEM HANDLE (P.230) (P.160)
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER (P.135) AUTOMATIC FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE TRANSMISSION HANDLE (P.229) (P.244) PARKING BRAKE LEVER MANUAL Vehicle without navigation system is shown. (P.151) TRANSMISSION (P.242)
4 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０７：０１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０００８
Your Vehicle at a Glance orVhcea Glance a at Vehicle Your HEADLIGHTS/FOG LIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS WINDSHIELD (P. 120-121) CONTROL (P. 122) WIPERS/WASHERS (P. 119)
HAZARD WARNING REMOTE AUDIO BUTTON CONTROL BUTTONS (P. 123) (P. 200)
MOONROOF SWITCH REAR WINDOW (P. 150) DEFOGGER BUTTON (P. 123) VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) OFF SWITCH (P. 256)
TM 1 CRUISE CONTROL HANDSFREELINK BUTTONS/ HORN＊ VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS＊2 (P. 212) BUTTONS (P. 204) STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT LEVER(P. 124) MULTI-INFORMATION SEAT HEATER SWITCHES Vehicle without navigation system is shown. BUTTONS(P. 70, 72) (P. 137)
＊1: To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘Acura’’ logo. ＊2: Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual. 5 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０７：０４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０００９
6 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０７：０８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００１０
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Lap/Shoulder Belt...... 22 The Passenger’s Front Airbag information about how to protect Automatic Seat Belt Can Pose Serious Risks...... 38 yourself and your passengers. It Tensioners...... 23 If You Must Drive with Several shows you how to use seat belts. It Seat Belt Maintenance...... 24 Children...... 40 Safety Passenger and Driver explains how your airbags work. And Additional Information About If a Child Requires Close it tells you how to properly restrain Your Airbags...... 25 Attention...... 40 infants and children in your vehicle. Airbag System Components...... 25 Additional Safety Precautions... . 41 How Your Front Airbags Protecting Infants and Important Safety Precautions...... 8 Work...... 28 Small Children...... 42 Your Vehicle’s Safety Features...... 9 How Your Side Airbags Work... . 32 Protecting Infants...... 42 Seat Belts...... 10 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Protecting Small Children...... 43 Airbags...... 11 Work...... 33 Selecting a Child Seat...... 45 Protecting Adults and Teens...... 13 How the SRS Indicator Works.. . 34 Installing a Child Seat...... 46 1. Close and Lock the Doors...... 13 How the Side Airbag Off Installing a Child Seat 2. Adjust the Front Seats...... 14 Indicator Works...... 34 with LATCH...... 47 3. Adjust the Seat-Backs...... 15 How the Passenger Airbag Off with a Lap/Shoulder Belt...... 49 4. Adjust the Head Restraints... . 16 Indicator Works...... 35 with a Tether...... 50 5. Fasten and Position the Seat Airbag Service...... 35 Protecting Larger Children...... 52 Belts...... 17 Additional Safety Precautions... . 36 Checking Seat Belt Fit...... 52 6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Protecting Children－ General Using a Booster Seat...... 53 Position...... 18 Guidelines...... 37 When Can a Larger Child Sit Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19 All Children Must Be in Front...... 54 Additional Safety Precautions... . 20 Restrained...... 37 Additional Safety Precautions... . 55 Additional Information About All Children Should Sit in the Carbon Monoxide Hazard...... 56 Your Seat Belts...... 21 Back Seat...... 38 Safety Labels...... 57 Seat Belt System Components.. . 21
7 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０７：１８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００１１
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed recommendations throughout this While airbags can save lives, they Excessive speed is a major factor in section, and throughout this manual. can cause serious or fatal injuries to crash injuries and deaths. Generally, Therecommendationsonthispage occupants who sit too close to them, the higher the speed, the greater the are the ones we consider to be the or are not properly restrained. risk, but serious injuries can also most important. Infants, young children, and short occur at lower speeds. Never drive Always Wear Your Seat Belt adults are at the greatest risk. Be faster than is safe for current A seat belt is your best protection in sure to follow all instructions and conditions, regardless of the all types of collisions. Airbags are warnings in this manual. maximum speed posted. designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though Don’t Drink and Drive Keep Your Vehicle in Safe your vehicle is equipped with airbags, Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even Condition make sure you and your passengers one drink can reduce your ability to Having a tire blowout or a always wear your seat belts, and respond to changing conditions, and mechanical failure can be extremely wear them properly (see page17 ). your reaction time gets worse with hazardous. To reduce the possibility every additional drink. So don’t drink of such problems, check your tire Restrain All Children and drive, and don’t let your friends pressures and condition frequently, Children age 12 and under should drink and drive, either. and perform all regularly scheduled ride properly restrained in a back maintenance (see page264 ). seat, not the front seat. Infants and smallchildrenshouldberestrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/ shoulder belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat (see pages37－ 55 ).
8 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０７：２５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００１２
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many (10) (9) (1) (4) (9) features that work together to (8) (8) protect you and your passengers during a crash. Safety Passenger and Driver (3) (2) Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a (7) strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment; front and rear crush zones; a collapsible steering column; and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a crash. (11) However, you and your passengers (7) (5) (6) can’t take full advantage of these features unless you remain sitting in (1) Safety Cage a proper position and always wear (2) Crush Zones (3) Seats and Seat-Backs your seat belts. In fact, some safety (4) Head Restraints features can contribute to injuries if (5) Collapsible Steering Column they are not used properly. (6) Seat Belts (2) (7) Front Airbags (8) Side Airbags The following pages explain how you (9) Side Curtain Airbags cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting (10) Door Locks yourself and your passengers. (11) Seat Belt Tensioners
9 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０７：３６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００１３
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants. increases the chance of serious Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even Keep you from being thrown out an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has airbags. of the vehicle. and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. Be sure you and your Help keep you in a good position passengers always wear seat should the airbags ever deploy. A Why Wear Seat Belts belts and wear them properly. good position reduces the risk of Seat belts are the single most injury from an inflating airbag and effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand allows you to get the best larger children. (Infants and smaller When properly worn, seat belts: advantage from the airbag. children must be properly restrained in child seats.) Keep you connected to the vehicle Of course, seat belts cannot so you can take advantage of the completely protect you in every Not wearing a seat belt properly vehicle’s built-in safety features. crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts increases the chance of serious can reduce your risk of serious injury or death in a crash, even Help protect you in almost every injury. though your vehicle has airbags. type of crash, including frontal, side, and rear impacts and What You Should Do: In addition, most states and all rollovers. Always wear your seat belt, and Canadian provinces require you to make sure you wear it properly. wear seat belts.
10
11
CONTINUED
uti ibg work). airbags curtain orfotaraswork). airbags front your
oeifraino o orside your how on information more 28 o oeifraino how on information more for
33 eeesd mat(e aefor page (see impact side severe orsd ibg work). airbags side your eeefotlcliin(e page (see collision frontal severe
32 oiin uigamdrt to moderate a during positions aefrmr nomto nhow on information more for page asne uigamdrt to moderate a during passenger
asnesi h ue erseating rear outer the in passengers oeaet eeesd mat(see impact side severe to moderate hsso h rvradafotseat front a and driver the of chests
h rvr rn asne,and passenger, front driver, the rafotsa asne uiga during passenger seat front a or ibg ohl rtc h ed and heads the protect help to airbags
ibg ohl rtc h ed of heads the protect help to airbags rtc h pe os ftedriver the of torso upper the protect etan ytm(R)wt front with (SRS) system restraint
orvhceas a iecurtain side has also vehicle Your orvhcehssd ibg ohelp to airbags side has vehicle Your orvhcehsasupplemental a has vehicle Your
Driver and Passenger Safety
Airbags
orVhcesSft Features Safety Vehicle’s Your ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０７：４８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００１４ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０７：５５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００１５
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety. Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A Remember, however, that no safety the seat belts. front passenger should move their system can prevent all injuries or seat as far back from the dashboard deaths that can occur in a severe Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible. crash, even when seat belts are impacts, or minor frontal or side properly worn and the airbags deploy. collisions.
Airbags can pose hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So while airbags help save lives, they can cause minor injuries or more serious or even fatal injuries if occupants are not properly restrained or sitting properly.
12 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０８：０３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００１６
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction1. Close and Lock the Doors The following pages provide After everyone has entered the instructions on how to properly vehicle, be sure the doors are closed protect the driver, adult passengers, and locked. Safety Passenger and Driver and teenage children who are large enough and mature enough to drive Your vehicle has a door and trunk or ride in the front. open monitor on the multi- information display to indicate when See pages37－ 55 for important a specific door or the trunk is not guidelines on how to properly tightly closed. You will see the protect infants, small children, and appropriate light/lights and the larger children who ride in your message for each condition. vehicle. When one or more doors are not tightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’ message will come on.
CONTINUED
13 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０８：０９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００１７
Protecting Adults and Teens
Locking the doors reduces the 2.Adjust the Front Seats If you sit too close to the steering chance of someone being thrown out wheel or dashboard, you can be of the vehicle during a crash, and it seriously injured by an inflating front helps prevent passengers from airbag, or by striking the steering accidentally opening a door and wheel or dashboard. falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door when you come to a stop.
See page128 for how to lock the doors. Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. Have a front passenger adjust their seat as far to the rear as possible.
14 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０８：１６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００１８
Protecting Adults and Teens
The National Highway Traffic Safety 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers Sitting too close to a front allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) airbag can result in serious Safety Passenger and Driver between the center of the steering injury or death if the front wheel and the chest. In addition to airbags inflate. adjusting the seat, you can adjust the steering wheel in and out and up and Always sit as far back from the down (see page124 ). front airbags as possible.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still See page138 for how to adjust the reach the controls, we recommend front seats. that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help. Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat- backs should also adjust their seat- back to a comfortable, upright position.
CONTINUED
15 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０８：２４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００１９
Protecting Adults and Teens
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head can result in serious injury or restraints reduces their death in a crash. effectiveness and you can be seriously injured in a crash. Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well Make sure head restraints are back in the seat. in place and positioned properly before driving.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer Properly adjusted head restraints rests against the occupant’s chest will help protect occupants from reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver’s head restraint so whiplash and other crash injuries. the belt. It also increases the chance the back of your head rests against of sliding under the belt in a crash the center of the restraint. See page139 for how to adjust the and being seriously injured. The head restraints. farther a seat-back is reclined, the Have passengers adjust their head greater the risk of injury. restraints properly as well. Taller persons should adjust their restraint See page138 for how to adjust the as high as possible. seat-backs.
16 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０８：３１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００２０
Protecting Adults and Teens
5.Fasten and Position the Seat This spreads the forces of a crash Belts over the strongest bones in your Insert the latch plate into the buckle, upper body. then tug on the belt to make sure the Safety Passenger and Driver belt is securely latched. Check that the belt is not twisted, because a twisted belt can cause serious Improperly positioning the seat injuries in a crash. belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of If the seat belt touches or crosses the belt so the lap part fits snugly. your neck, or if it crosses your arm This lets your strong pelvic bones instead of your shoulder, you need to take the force of a crash and reduces adjust the seat belt anchor height. the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. CONTINUED
17 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０８：３９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００２１
Protecting Adults and Teens
RELEASE BUTTONS Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and put on seat belts, it is very important that they continue to If a seat belt does not seem to work sit upright, well back in their seats, properly, it may not protect the with their feet on the floor, until the occupant in a crash. vehicle is parked and the engine is off. No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt. Using a seat Sitting improperly can increase the belt that is not working properly can chance of injury during a crash. For result in serious injury or death. example, if an occupant slouches, The front seats have adjustable seat Have your dealer check the belt as lies down, turns sideways, sits belt anchors. To adjust the height of soon as possible. forward, leans forward or sideways, an anchor, press and hold the release or puts one or both feet up, the buttons, and slide the anchor up or See page21 for additional chance of injury during a crash is down as needed (it has four information about your seat belts greatly increased. positions). and how to take care of them.
18 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０８：４６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００２２
Protecting Adults and Teens
In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit position in the front seat can be upright and adjust the seat as far seriously or fatally injured in a crash back as possible while allowing full by striking interior parts of the control of the vehicle. When riding Safety Passenger and Driver vehicle or being struck by an as a front passenger, adjust the seat inflating front airbag. as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child Sitting improperly or out of that can be caused by a crash or an position can result in serious inflating front airbag. injury or death in a crash. Each time you have a checkup, ask Always sit upright, well back in your doctor if it’s okay for you to the seat, with your feet on the If you are pregnant, the best way to drive. floor. protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt, and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
19 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０８：５２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００２３
Protecting Adults and Teens
Additional Safety Precautions Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach or place objects on Two people should never use the between yourself and a front the front airbag covers. Objects on same seat belt. If they do, they airbag. Carrying hard or sharp the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ could be very seriously injured in a objects on your lap, or driving with could interfere with the proper crash. a pipe or other sharp object in operation of the airbags or be your mouth, can result in injuries propelled inside the vehicle and Do not put any accessories on seat if your front airbag inflates. hurt someone if the airbags inflate. belts. Devices intended to improve occupant comfort or reposition the Keep your hands and arms away Do not attach hard objects on or shoulder part of a seat belt can from the airbag covers. If your near a door. If a side airbag or a reduce the protective capability of hands or arms are close to an side curtain airbag inflates, a cup the seat belt and increase the airbag cover, they could be injured holder or other hard object chance of serious injury in a crash. if the airbag inflates. attached on or near the door could be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone.
20 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０９：０１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００２４
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components If a front passenger does not fasten The seat belts use the same Your seat belt system includes lap/ their seat belt, the indicator will monitoring system as the front shoulder belts in all five seating come on about 6 seconds after the airbags. The system may not work positions. The front seat belts are ignition switch is turned to the ON properly under these conditions: Safety Passenger and Driver also equipped with automatic seat (II) position. belt tensioners. Placing heavy items on the front If either the driver or a front passenger’s seat. The seat belt system passenger does not fasten their seat includes an indicator on the belt while driving, the beeper will The front passenger is not sitting instrument panel and a beeper to sound and the indicator will flash properly. remind you and your passengers to again at regular intervals. You will fasten your seat belts. also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ or The front passenger’s seat-back is ‘‘PASSENGER FASTEN SEAT pressed forward by a folded-down This system monitors the front seat BELT’’ message in the multi- rear seat. belts. If you turn the ignition switch information display (see page78 ). to the ON (II) position before your Have your vehicle checked by a seat belt is fastened, the beeper will When no one is sitting in the front dealer if the indicator comes on or sound and the indicator will flash. If passenger’s seat, or a small child is the beeper sounds when there is no your seat belt is not fastened before riding there, the indicator will not front passenger or objects on the the beeper stops, the indicator will come on and the beeper will not front seat. stop flashing but remain on. sound.
21 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０９：０８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００２５
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Lap/Shoulder Belt To unlock the belt, press the red The seat belts in all positions except The lap/shoulder belt goes over PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide the driver’s have an additional your shoulder, across your chest, the belt across your body so that it locking mechanism that must be and across your hips. retracts completely. After exiting the activated to secure a child seat (see vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the page49 ). To fasten the belt, insert the latch way and will not get closed in the plate into the buckle, then tug on the door. If the shoulder part of the belt is belt to make sure the buckle is pulled all the way out, the locking latched (see page17 for how to All seat belts have an emergency mechanism will activate. The belt properly position the belt). locking retractor. In normal driving, will retract, but it will not allow the the retractor lets you move freely in passenger to move freely. your seat while it keeps some tension on the belt. During a collision To deactivate the locking or sudden stop, the retractor mechanism, unlatch the buckle and automatically locks the belt to help let the seat belt fully retract. To restrain your body. refasten the seat belt, pull it out only as far as needed.
22 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０９：１４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００２６
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to When the tensioners are activated, activate primarily in frontal collisions, the seat belts will remain tight until andtheyshouldactivateinany they are unbuckled in the normal collision severe enough to cause manner. Safety Passenger and Driver front-airbag inflation. If the front seat belt tensioners ever The tensioners can also be activated activate, they must be replaced as during a collision in which the front the belts will no longer retract airbagsdo not deploy . In this case, the properly. airbags would not be needed, but the additional restraint could be helpful.
For added protection, the front seat belts are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners. When activated, the tensioners immediately tighten the belts to help hold the driver and a front passenger in place.
23 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０９：２１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００２７
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash, For safety, you should check the it must be replaced by the dealer. A condition of your seat belts regularly. belt that has been worn during a Not checking or maintaining crash may not provide the same level seat belts can result in serious Pull each belt out fully, and look for of protection in a subsequent crash. injury or death if the seat belts frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check do not work properly when that the latches work smoothly and The dealer should also inspect the needed. the belts retract easily. If a belt does anchors for damage and replace not retract easily, cleaning the belt them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly may correct the problem (see page belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem 299 ). Any belt that is not in good crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible. condition or working properly will not provide good protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
Acura provides a lifetime warranty on seat belts for U.S. models. See your Acura Warranty Information booklet for details.
24
25
CONTINUED
1)Sd uti Airbags Curtain Side (14)
(4)
(13)
1)Sd matSnos(Second) Sensors Impact Side (13)
1)FotPsegrsWih esr/PSSnosCnrlUnit Control Sensors Sensors/OPDS Weight Passenger’s Front (12) (5)
1)Ocpn oiinDtcinSse OD)Sensors (OPDS) System Detection Position Occupant (11) (14)
(10)
1)Sd matSnos(First) Sensors Impact Side (10)
9 asne ibgOfIndicator Off Airbag Passenger (9) (7)
8 rn matSensors Impact Front (8)
(6)
(4)
7 rn asne’ egtSensors Weight Passenger’s Front (7)
6 rvrsSa oiinSensor Position Seat Driver’s (6)
(3)
(13) 5 ieAirbags Side (5)
4 rn etBl Tensioners Belt Seat Front (4)
3 oto Unit Control (3)
2 rn asne’ Airbag Passenger’s Front (2)
1 rvrsAirbag Driver’s (1)
(5)
(8)
(14)
(1)
(10)
(9) (12)
(11)
(2) Driver and Passenger Safety (8)
ibgSse Components System Airbag
diinlIfrainAotYu Airbags Your About Information Additional ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０９：２８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００２８ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０９：３５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００２９
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your airbag system includes: Two side curtain airbags, one for Sensors that can detect whether each side of the vehicle. The a child is in the passenger’s side Two SRS (supplemental restraint airbags are stored in the ceiling, airbag path and signal the system) front airbags. The driver’s above the side windows. The front control unit to turn the airbag airbag is stored in the center of and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE off (see page34 ). the steering wheel; the front CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe 33 ). A driver’s seat position sensor dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS that monitors the distance of AIRBAG’’ (see page28 ). Automatic front seat belt theseatfromthefrontairbag.If tensioners (see page23 ). the seat is too far forward, the Two side airbags, one for the airbag will inflate with less force driver and one for a front Sensors that can detect a (see page30 ). passenger. The airbags are stored moderate to severe front impact or in the outer edges of the seat- side impact. backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE AIRBAG’’ (see page32 ).
26 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０９：４０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００３０
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Weight sensors that monitor the An indicator on the instrument weight on the front passenger’s panel that alerts you that the seat. These automatically turn off passenger’s side airbag has been the passenger’s front airbag if turned off (see page34 ). Safety Passenger and Driver they detect an infant or a small childmaybeintheseat(seepage An indicator on the dashboard that 30 ). alerts you that the passenger’s front airbag has been turned off A sophisticated electronic system (see page35 ). that continually monitors and records information about the Emergency backup power in case sensors, the control unit, the your vehicle’s electrical system is airbag activators, the seat belt disconnected in a crash. tensioners, and driver and front passenger seat belt use when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position.
An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbags, sensors, or seat belt tensioners (see page34 ).
27 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０９：４８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００３１
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt restrains your lower body and torso, and the front airbag helps protect your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they won’t detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the driver’s visibility, deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate other controls. If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front inflate the driver’s and front seat, or if the advanced airbag passenger’s airbags, at the time and system has turned the passenger’s with the force needed. airbag off (see page35 ).
28 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：０９：５６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００３２
Additional Information About Your Airbags
The total time for inflation and Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags deflation is one-tenth of a second, so Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual- fast that most occupants are not airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this aware that the airbags deployed until inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment Safety Passenger and Driver they see them lying in their laps. sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether depending on crash severity. or not the occupant is wearing a seat After a crash, you may see what belt. looks like smoke. This is actually In amore severe crash, both stages powder from the airbag’s surface. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant’s belt isnot latched , Although the powder is not harmful, the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly people with respiratory problems lower threshold, because the mayexperiencesometemporary In aless severe crash, one stage will occupant would need extra discomfort. If this occurs, get out of ignite first, then the second stage protection. the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do will ignite a split second later. This so. provides longer airbag inflation time It the occupant’s belt islatched , the with a little less force. airbag will deploy at a slightly higher threshold, when the airbag would be needed to supplement the protection provided by the seat belt.
CONTINUED
29 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１０：０５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００３３
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags Your front airbags are also advanced airbags. The main purpose of this feature is to help prevent airbag- caused injuries to short drivers and children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work properly: DRIVER’S SEAT Occupants must sit upright and POSITION PASSENGER’S SENSOR SEAT WEIGHT wear their seat belts properly. SENSOR
Do not spill any liquids on or The driver’s advanced front airbag The passenger’s advanced front under the seats, cover the sensors, system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors or put any cargo or metal objects sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Acura does under the front seats. too far forward, the airbag will not encourage carrying an infant or inflate with less force, regardless of small child in front, if the sensors Back-seat passengers should not the severity of the impact. detect the weight of an infant or put their feet under the front seats. small child, the system will If there is a problem with the sensor, automatically turn the passenger’s Failure to follow these instructions the SRS indicator will come on, and front airbag off. could damage the sensors or prevent the airbag will inflate in the normal them from working properly. manner regardless of the driver’s seating position.
30 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１０：１３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００３４
Additional Information About Your Airbags
When the airbag is turned off, an Moving the front seat forcibly indicator in the center of the back against cargo on the seat or dashboard will come on indicating floor behind it. passenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page Safety Passenger and Driver 35 ). Moving the front seat forcibly back on the folded rear seat. If the weight sensors detect there is no passenger in the front seat, the Folding the rear seat-back onto a airbag will be off. However, the reclined front passenger’s seat- passenger airbag off indicator will back. not come on. Hanging heavy items on the front To ensure that the passenger’s passenger seat, or placing heavy advanced front airbag system will items in the seat-back pocket. work properly, do not do anything that would increase or decrease the Also,makesurethefloormatbehind weight on the front passenger’s seat. the front passenger’s seat is hooked This includes: to the floor mat anchor (see page 299 ). If it is not, the mat may A rear passenger pushing or interfere with the proper operation pulling on the back of the front of the sensors and operation of the passenger’s seat. seat.
31 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１０：２０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００３５
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Airbags Work Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System side impact. If the impact is on the To reduce the risk of injury from an passenger’s side, the passenger’s inflating side airbag, your vehicle has side airbag will deploy even if there an automatic cutoff system for the is no passenger. passenger’s side airbag.
To get the best protection from the Although Acura does not encourage side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, this system should wear their seat belts and sit is designed to shut off the side upright and well back in their seats. airbag if a child leans into the side airbag’s path.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa short adult leans sideways, or a If you ever have a moderate to larger adult slouches and leans severe side impact, sensors will sideways into the airbag’s detect rapid deceleration and signal deployment path. the control unit to instantly inflate either the driver’s or the passenger’s Objects placed on the front side airbag. passenger seat can also cause the side airbag to be shut off.
32 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１０：２７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００３６
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If the side airbag off indicator comes How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger’s on (see page34 ), have the Work side, the passenger’s side curtain passenger sit upright. Once the airbag will inflate even if there are no passenger is out of the airbag’s occupants on that side of the vehicle. Safety Passenger and Driver deployment path, the system will turn the airbag back on, and the To get the best protection from the indicator will go out. side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts and sit There will be some delay between upright and well back in their seats. the moment the passenger moves into or out of the airbag deployment pathandwhentheindicatorcomes on or goes off. SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG A front seat passenger should not use a cushion or other object as a In a moderate to severe side impact, backrest. It may prevent the cutoff sensors will detect rapid deceleration system from working properly. and signal the control unit to instantly inflate the side curtain airbag on the driver’s or the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
33 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１０：３８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００３７
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the SRS Indicator WorksYou will also see a ‘‘CHECK How the Side Airbag Off The SRS indicator alerts AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message in the Indicator Works you to a potential problem multi-information display (see page U.S. Canada This indicator with your airbags or seat belt 82 ). alerts you that the tensioners. passenger’s side If you see any of these indications, airbag has been automatically shut When you turn the ignition switch to the airbags and seat belt tensioners off. It doesnot mean there is a the ON (II) position, this indicator may not work properly when you problem with your side airbags. comes on for several seconds then need them. goes off. This tells you the system is When you turn the ignition switch to working properly. the ON (II) position, the indicator should come on for several seconds If the indicator comes on at any Ignoring the SRS indicator can andthengooff(seepage64 ).Ifit other time, or does not come on at all, result in serious injury or death doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes you should have the system checked if the airbag systems or on while driving without a passenger by your dealer. For example: tensioners do not work properly. in the front seat, have the system checked. If the SRS indicator does not come Have your vehicle checked by a on after you turn the ignition dealer as soon as possible if switch to the ON (II) position. the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem. If the indicator stays on after the engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
34 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１０：４８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００３８
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off If no one is riding in the front seat, Airbag Service Indicator Works the airbag will be automatically shut Your airbag systems are virtually off. However, the indicator will not maintenance free, and there are no come on. parts you can safely service. Safety Passenger and Driver However, you must have your If the indicator comes on with no vehicle serviced if: passenger in the front, or with an adult in the seat, there may be a An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag problem with the advanced airbag that has deployed must be U.S. Canada system. Have the vehicle checked by replaced along with the control your dealer as soon as possible. unit and other related parts. If a front airbag inflates, the seat belt The passenger airbag off indicator tensioners must also be replaced. PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR may also come on and off repeatedly if total weight on the seat is near the Do not try to remove or replace This indicator alerts you that the airbag cutoff threshold. anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust passenger’s side airbag has been be done by your dealer or a shut off because weight sensors If this happens, have the passenger knowledgeable body shop. detect the weight of an infant or a ride properly restrained in a back small child on the front passenger’s seat. If the passenger must ride in The SRS indicator alerts you to a seat. It doesnot mean there is a front, move the seat as far to the problem. Take your vehicle to an problem with your side airbags. rear as possible, have the passenger authorized dealer as soon as sit upright and wear the seat belt possible. If you ignore this properly. indication, your airbags may not operate properly. CONTINUED
35 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１０：５５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００３９
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If your vehicle has a moderate to Do not remove or modify a front Do not recline the front passenger’s severe impact. Even if your seat without consulting your seat-back as far to the rear as airbags do not inflate, your dealer dealer. This could make the possible with the right rear seat should inspect the driver’s seat driver’s seat position sensor or the foldeddown.This will cause the position sensor, the front front passenger’s weight sensors front passenger’s weight sensors passenger’s weight sensors, the ineffective. If it is necessary to to work improperly. The system front seat belt tensioners, and all remove or modify a front seat to may shut off the front passenger’s seat belts worn during the crash to accommodate a person with airbag and the passenger airbag make sure they are operating disabilities, first contact Acura off indicator will come on. The properly. Client Services at 800-382-2238. seat belt reminder indicator and a ‘‘PASSENGER FASTEN Additional Safety Precautions Do not cover or replace front seat- SEATBELT’’ message in the multi- Donotattempttodeactivateyour back covers without consulting information display may also work airbags. Together, airbags and your dealer. Improperly replacing improperly. seat belts provide the best or covering front seat-back covers protection. can prevent your side airbags from Make sure that the folded-down inflating during a side impact. rear seat does not press the front Do not tamper with airbag passenger’s seat-back. Check the components or wiring for any Do not expose the front seat-backs passenger airbag off indicator to reason. Tampering could cause to liquid. If water or another liquid confirm that the passenger’s the airbags to deploy, possibly soaks into a seat-back, it can advanced front airbag is operating causing very serious injury. prevent the side airbag cutoff properly. system from working properly.
36 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１１：０４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００４０
Protecting Children－ General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be Safety Passenger and Driver properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a accidents are the number one cause crash. of the death of children ages 12 and under. Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary. Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a them. However, despite their best vehicle. intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained how toproperly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages52－ 55 ). If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages42－ 51 ). drive with a child in your vehicle, be sure to read this section. It begins with important general guidelines, then presents special information for infants, small children, and larger children.
37 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１１：１５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００４１
Protecting Children－ General Guidelines
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children Seat Can Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is back seat. The National Highway the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is Traffic Safety Administration and large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an Transport Canada recommend that force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the all children age 12 and under be child with enough force to kill or properly restrained in a back seat. Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child. advanced front airbag system, which Some states have laws restricting can automatically turn the Larger Children where children may ride. passenger’s front airbag off (see Children who have outgrown child page35 ), please follow the seats are also at risk of being injured Children who ride in back are less guidelines below. or killed by an inflating passenger’s likely to be injured by striking front airbag. Whenever possible, interior vehicle parts during a Infants larger children should sit in the back collision or hard braking. Also, Never put a rear-facing child seat in seat, on a booster seat if needed, and children cannot be injured by an the front seat of a vehicle equipped be properly restrained with a seat inflating front airbag when they ride with a passenger’s front airbag. If belt (see page52 for important in the back. the airbag inflates, it can hit the back information about protecting larger of the child seat with enough force children). to kill or very seriously injure an infant.
38 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１１：２７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００４２
Protecting Children－ General Guidelines
To remind you of the passenger’s U.S. Models DASHBOARD front airbag hazards, and that SUN VISOR children must be properly restrained in a back seat, your vehicle has Safety Passenger and Driver warninglabelsonthedashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models SUN VISOR
39 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１１：３５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００４３
Protecting Children－ General Guidelines
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical Children Attention attention or frequent visual Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put contact, we strongly recommend children can be properly restrained. an infant or a small child in the front that another adult ride with the If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the child in a back seat. The back seat children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires is far safer for a child than the front: attention. front.
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close belt properly (see page52 ). attention to a child distracts the driver from the important tasks of Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk. rear as possible (see page14 ).
Have the child sit upright and well backintheseat(seepage15 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly positioned and secured (see page 17 ).
40 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１１：４３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００４４
Protecting Children－ General Guidelines
Additional Safety Precautions Use the childproof door locks to Lock all doors and the trunk when Never hold an infant or a child on prevent children from opening the your vehicle is not in use. Children your lap. If you are not wearing a rear doors. This can prevent who play in vehicles can seat belt in crash, you could be children from accidentally falling accidentally get trapped inside. Safety Passenger and Driver thrown forward and crush the out (see page129 ). Teach your children not to play in child against the dashboard or a or around vehicles. Know how to seat-back. If you are wearing a Do not leave children alone in a operate the emergency trunk seat belt, the child can be torn vehicle. Leaving children without opener and decide if your children from your arms and be seriously adult supervision is illegal in most should be shown how to use this hurt or killed. states and Canadian provinces, feature(seepage136 ). and can be very hazardous. Never put a seat belt over yourself Keep vehicle keys and remote and a child. During a crash, the For example, infants and small transmitters out of the reach of belt could press deep into the child childrenleftinavehicleonahot children. Even very young and cause serious or fatal injuries. day can die from heatstroke. A children learn how to unlock child left alone with the key in the vehicle doors, turn on the ignition Never let two children use the ignition switch can accidentally set switch, and open the trunk, which same seat belt. If they do, they the vehicle in motion, possibly can lead to accidental injury or could be very seriously injured in a injuring themselves or others. death. crash.
41 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１１：５２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００４５
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Rear-facing Child Seat Placement seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat. a forward-facing position. If placed facing forward, an infant could be If the passenger’s front airbag very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear- facing child seat may prevent the Child Seat Type driver or a front passenger from An infant must be properly moving their seat as far back as restrained in a rear-facing, reclining recommended, or from locking their child seat until the child reaches the seat-back in the desired position. seat maker’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the child is at least Or, it can interfere with proper one year old. operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag system. Only a rear-facing child seat provides proper support for a baby’s head, neck, and back.
42 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１１：５９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００４６
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any situation, we strongly Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small recommend that you install the child child use the child seat as long as seat directly behind the front possible, until the child reaches the passenger’s seat, move the seat as weight or height limit for the seat. Safety Passenger and Driver far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a collision. Child Seat Type Always place a rear-facing child A child who is at least one year old, seat in the back seat, not the and who fits within the child seat front. maker’s weight and height limits, should be restrained in a forward- facing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we recommend those that have a five- point harness system as shown.
CONTINUED
43 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１２：０５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００４７
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Child Seat Placement If it is necessary to put a forward- We strongly recommend placing a facing child seat in the front, move forward-facing child seat in a back the vehicle seat as far to the rear as Placing a forward-facing child seat, not the front. possible, and be sure the child seat is seat in the front seat can result firmly secured to the vehicle and the in serious injury or death if the Placing a forward-facing child seat in child is properly strapped in the seat. front airbag inflates. the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passenger’s airbag can be Ifyoumustplaceaforward- hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too facing child seat in front, move far forward, or the child’s head is the vehicle seat as far back as thrown forward during a collision, an possible, and properly restrain inflating airbag can strike the child the child. with enough force to cause very serious or fatal injuries.
Even with advanced front airbags, which can automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off (see page35 ), a back seat is the safest place for a small child.
44 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１２：１４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００４８
Selecting Child Seats
When buying a child seat, you need We also recommend selecting a 2. The child seat should be of the to choose either a conventional child LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid, proper type and size to fit the child. seat, or one designed for use with rather than a flexible, anchor (see Rear-facing for infants, forward- the lower anchors and tethers for page47 ). facing for small children. Safety Passenger and Driver children (LATCH) system. In seating positions and vehicles not 3. The child seat should fit the Conventional child seats must be equipped with LATCH, a LATCH- vehicle seating position (or secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, compatible child seat can be installed positions) where it will be used. whereas LATCH-compatible seats using a seat belt. are secured by attaching the seat to Before purchasing a conventional hardware built into the two outer Whatever type of seat you choose, to child seat, or using a previously seating positions in the back seat. provide proper protection, a child purchased one, we recommend that seat should meet three you test the seat in the specific Since LATCH-compatible child seats requirements: vehicle seating position or positions are easier to install and reduce the where the seat will be used. possibility of improper installation, 1. The child seat should meet U.S. or we recommend selecting this style. Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
45 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１２：２１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００４９
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat A child seat secured with a seat belt 3. Secure the child in the child seat. and a good place to install the seat, should be installed as firmly as Make sure the child is properly there are three main steps in possible. However, it does not need strappedinthechildseat installing the seat: to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side according to the child seat maker’s movement can be expected and instructions. A child who is not 1. Properly secure the child seat to should not reduce the child seat’s properly secured in a child seat the vehicle. All child seats must be effectiveness. canbeseriouslyinjuredinacrash. secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with If the child seat is not secure, try The following pages provide the LATCH (lower anchors and installing it in a different seating guidelines on how to properly install tethers for children) system. A position, or use a different style of a child seat. A forward-facing child child whose seat is not properly child seat that can be firmly secured. seat is used in all examples, but the secured to the vehicle can be instructions are the same for rear- endangered in a crash. facing child seats.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured. After installing a child seat, push and pull the seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.
46 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１２：３０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００５０
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with BUTTON LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH (lower anchors and tethers Safety Passenger and Driver for children) at the outer rear seats.
The lower anchors are located between the seat-back and seat bottom, and are to be used only with a child seat designed for use with LATCH. LOWER ANCHORS Rigid type The location of each lower anchor is indicated by a small button above the To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle anchor point. seat: seat, then attach the seat to the lower anchors according to the 1. Move the seat belt buckle or child seat maker’s instructions. tongue away from the lower anchors. Some LATCH-compatible seats have a rigid-type connector as 2. Make sure there are no objects shown above. near the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the child seat and the anchors. CONTINUED
47 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１２：３８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００５１
Installing a Child Seat
TETHER STRAP HOOK 6. Attach the tether strap hook to the tether anchor, then tighten the strap as instructed by the child seat maker.
7. Pushandpullthechildseat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.
Flexible type ANCHOR Other LATCH-compatible seats 5. Lift the head restraint (see page have a flexible-type connector as 139 ), then route the tether strap shown above. through the legs of the head restraint and over the seat-back, 4. Whatever type you have, follow making sure the strap is not the child seat maker’s instructions twisted. for adjusting or tightening the fit. If the tether strap is too long and cannot be tightened firmly, find a route where the strap can be tightened securely.
48 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１２：４８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００５２
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/ Shoulder Belt When not using the LATCH system, all child seats must be secured to the Safety Passenger and Driver vehicle with the lap part of a lap/ shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions except the driver’s have a locking mechanism that must be activated to secure a child seat.
1.With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor, seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops, to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the then insert the latch plate into the retractor. buckle. 3. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is locked, you will not be able to pull it out. If you can pull thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
49 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１２：５８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００５３
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Tether
ANCHORAGE POINTS
4.After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat ANCHOR COVER locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to A child seat with a tether can be up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving installed in any seating position in lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not the back seat, using the anchorage the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to points shown above. the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these steps. Since a tether can provide additional To remove slack, it may help to security to the lap/shoulder belt putweightonthechildseat,or To deactivate the locking installation, we recommend using a push on the back of the seat while mechanism and remove a child seat, tether whenever one is required or pulling up on the belt. unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat available. belt, and let the belt fully retract.
50 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１３：０７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００５４
Installing a Child Seat
Using an Outer Anchor 2. Lift the anchor cover, then attach Using the Center Anchor the tether strap hook to the TETHER STRAP HOOK anchor, making sure the strap is TETHER STRAP HOOK not twisted. Safety Passenger and Driver
3. Tighten the strap according to the seat maker’s instructions.
ANCHOR ANCHOR 1. After properly securing the child 1. After properly securing the child seat (see page49 ), lift the head seat (see page49 ), route the restraint, then route the tether tether strap over the seat-back. strap over the seat-back and through the head restraint legs. 2. Follow steps 2 and 3 from the previous column. If the tether strap is too long and cannot be tightened firmly, find a route where the strap can be tightened securely.
51 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１３：１４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００５５
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit recommended weight or height limit for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder or death if the passenger’s front belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give If a larger child must ride in front, instructions on how to check proper move the vehicle seat as far seat belt fit, what kind of booster back as possible, use a booster seat to use if one is needed, and seat if needed, have the child important precautions for a child sit up properly and wear the who must sit in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt properly fits a child, have the child put on the seat belt, then ask yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat?
52 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１３：２３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００５６
Protecting Larger Children
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Booster seats can be high-back or between the child’s neck and arm? low-back. Whichever style you select, make sure the booster seat meets 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as federal safety standards (see page Safety Passenger and Driver possible, touching the child’s 45 ) and that you follow the booster thighs? seat maker’s instructions.
5. Will the child be able to stay If a child who uses a booster seat seated like this for the whole trip? must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible and be If you answer yes to all these sure the child is wearing the seat questions, the child is ready to wear belt properly. the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the A child may continue using a booster child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward- seat until the tops of their ears are facing child seat should ride in a even with the top of the vehicle’s or back seat and use a booster seat booster’s seat-back. A child of this until the lap/shoulder belt fits them height should be tall enough to use properly without the booster. the lap/shoulder belt without a Some states and Canadian provinces booster seat. also require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the states or provinces where you intend to drive.
53 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１３：３３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００５７
Protecting Larger Children
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And If you decide that a child can safely Front while age may be one indicator of ride up front, be sure to: The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front, Administration and Transport there are other important factors you Carefully read the owner’s manual, Canada recommend that all children should consider. and make sure you understand all age 12 and under be properly seat belt instructions and all safety restrained in a back seat. Physical Size information. Physically, a child must be large If the passenger’s front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to Move the vehicle seat to the rear- inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages17 and52 ). If most position. frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly, serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a Have the child sit up straight, back unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit against the seat, and feet on or sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front. near the floor. of position. Maturity Check that the child’s seat belt is A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must properly positioned and secured. part of a larger child’s body is in the be able to follow the rules, including path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat Supervise the child. Even mature child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride. children sometimes need to be injuries. reminded to fasten the seat belts or sit properly.
54 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１３：３８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００５８
Protecting Larger Children
Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to across the neck. This could result improve a child’s comfort or in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a Safety Passenger and Driver crash. seat belt can make the belt less effective and increase the chance Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash. part of a seat belt behind the back or under the arm. This could cause very serious injuries during a crash. It also increases the chance that the child will slide under the belt in a crash and be injured.
Two children should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.
55 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１３：４６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００５９
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the trunk open, airflow can pull carbon monoxide gas. You should exhaust gas into your vehicle’s have no problem with carbon Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous monoxide entering the vehicle in Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the normal driving if you maintain your unconsciousness and even kill trunk open, open all the windows and vehicle properly. you. set the climate control system as shown below. Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle carbon monoxide. with the engine running, even in an The vehicle is raised for an oil unconfined area, adjust the climate change. control system as follows: High levels of carbon monoxide can You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the fresh air mode. of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode. engine with the garage door closed. 3. Set the fan speed to high. The vehicle was in an accident Even with the door open, run the 4. Set the temperature control to a that may have damaged the engine only long enough to move the comfortable setting. underside. vehicle out of the garage.
56
57
CONTINUED
aainmodels Canadian
..models U.S.
HOOD
elrfrareplacement. a for dealer
eoe yteonr,cnatyour contact owner), the by removed
ahor ae hc a be may which label dashboard
ora ecp o h U.S. the for (except read to
falblcmsofo eoe hard becomes or off comes label a If
nuy edteelbl carefully. labels these Read injury.
Driver and Passenger Safety
aad htcudcueserious cause could that hazards
hw.Te anyuo potential of you warn They shown. ..mdl only models U.S.
AITRCAP RADIATOR hs aesaei h locations the in are labels These DASHBOARD
aeyLabels Safety ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１４：０４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００６０
58
aainmodels Canadian
..mdl aainmodels Canadian models U.S.
..models U.S.
DOORJAMBS U VISOR SUN
aeyLabels Safety ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１４：２１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００６１ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１４：２５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００６２
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Control Locations...... 60 Trunk Main Switch...... 136 the controls and displays that Instrument Panel...... 61 Seat Heaters...... 137 contribute to the daily operation of Instrument Panel Indicators...... 62 Seats...... 138 your vehicle. All the essential Gauges...... 68 Power Seat Adjustment...... 138 controls are within easy reach. Multi-Information Display...... 69 Driver’s Lumbar Support...... 138 Controls Near the Steering Head Restraints...... 139 Controls and Instruments Wheel...... 118 Folding Rear Seat...... 140 Windshield Wipers and Driving Position Memory Washers...... 119 System...... 142 Turn Signal and Headlights...... 120 Mirrors...... 145 Fog Lights...... 121 Adjusting the Power Mirrors.. . 146 Automatic Lighting Off Power Mirror Heaters...... 146 Feature...... 121 Power Windows...... 147 Daytime Running Lights...... 121 Moonroof...... 150 Instrument Panel Brightness...... 122 Parking Brake...... 151 Hazard Warning...... 123 Sun Visor...... 152 Rear Window Defogger...... 123 Vanity Mirror...... 152 Steering Wheel Adjustment...... 124 Interior Lights...... 153 Keys and Locks...... 125 Interior Convenience Items...... 155 Immobilizer System...... 126 Beverage Holders...... 156 Ignition Switch...... 127 Accessory Power Sockets...... 156 Door Locks...... 128 Console Compartment...... 157 Childproof Door Locks...... 129 Sunglasses Holder...... 158 Remote Transmitter...... 130 Glove Box...... 158 Trunk...... 135 Emergency Trunk Opener...... 136
59 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１４：３２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００６３
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL (P.61) MIRROR CONTROL AUTO BUTTON (P.145) AUDIO SYSTEM GAUGES(P.68) (P.170)
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (P.142)
MIRRORS CONTROLS (P.146) CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (P.160)
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH (P.128) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P.244) POWER WINDOW MANUAL SWITCHES TRANSMISSION (P.147) (P.242)
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER (P.135) FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE (P.229) HOOD RELEASE HANDLE PARKING BRAKE LEVER (P.230) (P.151) Vehicle without navigation system is shown.
60 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１４：４４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００６４
Instrument Panel
IMMOBILIZER LIGHTS ON INDICATOR(P.64) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.64) HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.66) VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
FOG LIGHT SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.65) Controls and Instruments INDICATOR (P.66) VSA ACTIVATION MULTI-INFORMATION INDICATOR (P.65) DISPLAY (P.69) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) SEAT BELT INDICATOR (P.66) REMINDER INDICATOR (P.62) LOW FUEL INDICATOR SYSTEM (P.66) MESSAGE INDICATOR (P.67)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR＊(P.63) SYSTEM LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR＊ SECURITY INDICATOR (P.67) INDICATOR (P.62) (P.64) (P.62) CRUISE MAIN SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT INDICATOR SYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR (P.63) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P.62) (P.66) ＊ : The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text. 61 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１４：５５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００６５
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many If your front passenger does not Low Oil Pressure indicators to give you important fasten their seat belt, the indicator Indicator information about your vehicle. comes on about 6 seconds after the The engine can be severely damaged ignition switch is turned to the ON if this indicator flashes or stays on Seat Belt Reminder (II) position. when the engine is running. For Indicator more information, see page323 . This indicator comes on when you If either of you do not fasten your You will also see a ‘‘CHECK turn the ignition switch to the ON seat belt while driving, the beeper ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message in (II) position. It reminds you and your will sound and the indicator will flash the multi-information display (see passengers to fasten your seat belts. again at regular intervals. For more page81 ). A beeper also sounds if you and your information, see page21 . front passenger have not fastened You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT Charging System your seat belts. BELT’’ or ‘‘PASSENGER FASTEN Indicator SEAT BELT’’ message in the multi- If this indicator comes on when the If you turn the ignition switch to the information display (see page78 ). engine is running, the battery is not ON (II) position before fastening being charged, and you will also see your seat belts, the beeper sounds, Malfunction Indicator a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’ and the indicator flashes. If you do Lamp message in the multi-information not fasten your seat belts before the You will also see a ‘‘CHECK display (see page83 ). For more beeper stops, the indicator stops EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message in information, see page324 . flashing but remains on. the multi-information display (see page83 ). For more information, see page324 .
62 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１５：０３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００６６
Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S. Canada 2. If it stays on after you have fully Supplemental Restraint released the parking brake while System (SRS) Indicator the engine is running, or if it This indicator comes on for several Parking Brake and Brake System comes on while driving, it can seconds when you turn the ignition Indicator indicate a problem in the brake switch to the ON (II) position. If it This indicator has two functions: system. You will also see a comes on at any other time, it Controls and Instruments ‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ or indicates a potential problem with 1. Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe ‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’ your front airbags. This indicator will ignition switch to the ON (II) message in the multi-information also alert you to a potential problem position. It is a reminder to check display (see pages79 ,83 ). For with your side airbags, passenger’s the parking brake. Driving with more information, see page326 . side airbag automatic cutoff system, the parking brake not fully automatic seat belt tensioners, side released can damage the rear curtain airbags, driver’s seat position brakes, axles, and tires. sensor, or the front passenger’s weight sensors. You will also see a If you drive without releasing the ‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ parking brake, a beeper will sound, message in the multi-information and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE display (see page82 ). For more PARKING BRAKE’’ message in information, see page34 . the multi-information display (see page78 ).
63 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１５：１１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００６７
Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S. Canada Lights On Indicator Immobilizer System Indicator This indicator reminds you that the This indicator comes on for a few Side Airbag Off Indicator exterior lights are on. It comes on seconds when you turn the ignition This indicator comes on when you when the light switch is in either the switch to the ON (II) position. It will turn the ignition switch to the ON or position. If you turn the then go off if you have a properly- (II) position. If it comes on at any ignition switch to the ACCESSORY coded ignition key. If it is not a other time, it indicates that the (I) or the LOCK (0) position without properly-coded key, the indicator will passenger’s side airbag has turning off the light switch, this blink and the engine will not start automatically shut off. You will also indicator will remain on. A reminder (see page126 ). see a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG chime will also sound when you open OFF’’ message in the multi- the driver’s door. This indicator also blinks several information display (see page81 ). times when you turn the ignition For more information, see page34 . switch from the ON (II) position to the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) position.
64 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１５：２３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００６８
Instrument Panel Indicators
Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator Turn Signal and (VSA) System Indicator Hazard Warning This indicator normally comes on for This indicator has three functions. Indicators a few seconds when you turn the The left or right turn signal indicator ignition switch to the ON (II) 1. Itcomesonasareminderthatyou blinks when you signal a lane change position. have turned off the vehicle or turn. If the indicator does not Controls and Instruments stability assist (VSA) system. blink or blinks rapidly, it usually Ifitcomesonandstaysonatany means one of the turn signal bulbs is other time, or it does not come on 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see burned out (see page293 ). Replace when you turn the ignition switch to page255 ). the bulb as soon as possible, since the ON (II) position, there is a other drivers cannot see that you are problem with the VSA system. You 3. It comes on along with the VSA signaling. will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA system indicator if there is a SYSTEM’’ message in the multi- problem with the VSA system. When you press the hazard warning information display (see page81 ). You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA button, both turn signals blink. All Take your vehicle to a dealer to have SYSTEM’’ message in the multi- turn signals on the outside of the it checked. Without VSA, your information display (see page81 ). vehicle should flash. vehicle still has normal driving ability, but will not have VSA traction and This indicator normally comes on for stability enhancement. For more a few seconds when you turn the information, see page255 . ignition switch to the ON (II) position. For more information, see page255 .
65 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１５：３４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００６９
Instrument Panel Indicators
Anti-lock Brake System High Beam Indicator Low Fuel Indicator (ABS) Indicator This indicator normally comes on for This indicator comes on with the a few seconds when you turn the high beam headlights. For more ignition switch to the ON (II) information, see page120 . position. If this indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem in On Canadian models, this indicator theABS.Ifthishappens,takethe comes on with reduced brightness vehicle to your dealer to have it when the daytime running lights checked. With this indicator on, your (DRL) are on (see page121 ). vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function. You Fog Light Indicator will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS LOW FUEL INDICATOR SYSTEM’’ message in the multi- This indicator comes on when you information display (see page82 ). turn on the fog lights. For more This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It For more information, see page253 . information, see page121 . comesonasareminderthatyou must refuel soon. You will also see a Cruise Main Indicator ‘‘FUEL LOW’’ message in the multi- information display (see page80 ). This indicator comes on when you When the indicator comes on, there turn on the cruise control system by is about 2.3 U.S. gal (8.6 )offuel pressing the CRUISE button on the remaining in the tank before the steering wheel (see page204 ). needle reaches E.
66 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１５：４１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００７０
Instrument Panel Indicators
System Message Security System Indicator Indicator This indicator comes on when there is a system message in the multi- information display. Press the INFO button on the steering wheel (see Controls and Instruments page70 ) to see the message (see page75 ).
Most of the time, this indicator comes on along with other indicators in the instrument panel such as the seat belt reminder indicator, SRS SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR indicator, VSA system indicator, etc. This indicator comes on when the security system is set. For more information, see page203 .
67 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１５：４８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００７１
Gauges
Fuel Gauge TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER This shows how much fuel you have. It may show slightly more TEMPERATURE or less than the actual amount. GAUGE FUEL GAUGE The needle returns to the bottom after you turn off the ignition.
Avoid driving with an extremely low f uel level. Running out of f uel could cause the engine to misf ire, damaging the catalytic converter. INFO KNOB U.S. Model is shown. SELECT/RESET KNOB Temperature Gauge (Hot) mark, pull safely to the side of This shows the temperature of the the road. See page321 for engine’s coolant. During normal instructions and precautions on operation, the pointer should rise to checking the engine’s cooling about the middle of the gauge. In system. severe driving conditions, such as very hot weather or a long period of uphill driving, the pointer may rise to the upper zone. If it reaches the red
68 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１５：５８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００７２
Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display in the Normal Display Messages instrument panel displays various information and messages when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. Some of the messages help you operate your vehicle more Controls and Instruments comfortably. Others help to keep you aware of the periodic maintenance your vehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving.
There are three types of messages; normal display messages, engine oil life and maintenance messages, and When you unlock and open the If you use the key to unlock the system messages. driver’s door with the remote driver’s door, the display only shows transmitter, the display shows ‘‘Welcome.’’ This means the system You can also customize some vehicle ‘‘Welcome DRIVER 1’’ or ‘‘Welcome cannot recognize either ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ control settings to your liking with DRIVER 2’’ depending on which or ‘‘DRIVER 2.’’ In this case, you the multi-information display and the remote transmitter you use. The cannot use the customize settings in two buttons on the steering wheel driver’s ‘‘ID’’ is detected by the the multi-information display (see (see page85 ). transmitter. For more information page85 ). about driver’s ‘‘ID’’, see page131 . When you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, the display shows ‘‘Goodbye.’’ CONTINUED
69 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１６：０７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００７３
Multi-Information Display
The primary display always shows its default setting, ‘‘INST. MPG’’ (U.S. PRIMARY DISPLAY models) or ‘‘INST. L/100 km’’ UPPER SEGMENT (Canadian models) even if you press the INFO button. It only changes the secondary display. You can customize this setting to your liking (see page101 ).
Messages in the trip computer include: SECONDARY DISPLAY INST.MPG(U.S.models)/ INFO KNOB INFO BUTTON LOWER SEGMENT INST.L/100 km (Canadian models): Your vehicle’s current The multi-information display The upper segment is divided into fuel mileage. consists of two segments; an upper two displays; primary and secondary. segment and a lower segment. When you turn the ignition switch to AVG. FUEL A/AVG. FUEL B: the ON (II) position, what you last Your vehicle’s average fuel In normal display mode, the upper selected is displayed. Each time you economy since you last reset the segment displays trip computer. The presstheINFObuttononthe Trip A or Trip B. When you select lower segment displays the steering wheel or the INFO knob in Trip B in the lower segment by odometer, Trip A/B, outside the instrument panel, the secondary pressing the SEL/RESET button temperature, and engine oil life and display of the trip computer changes on the steering wheel or Select/ maintenance message. asshownonthenextpage. Resetknobintheinstrument panel, the AVG. FUEL B appears in the secondary display.
70 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１６：１３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００７４
Multi-Information Display
RANGE: The estimated distance you can travel on the fuel remaining in the tank. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy you received over the last several miles, so it will vary Controls and Instruments with changes in speed, traffic, etc.
ELAPSED TIME: The time traveled since you last reset the trip computer. When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, ELAPSED TIME is reset.
AVG. SPEED: The average speed you are traveling.
: Press SEL/RESET Button. : Press INFO Button. U.S. model is shown
71 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１６：２１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００７５
Multi-Information Display
LOWER SEGMENT SEL/RESET BUTTON SELECT/RESET : Press the INFO Button. KNOB U.S.model is shown
In the lower segment, each time you You can also change the display by Trip Meter press the SEL/RESET button on the pushing the Select/Reset knob in the While a trip meter is displayed, you steering wheel, the display changes instrument panel. can change the display between from ‘‘Trip A/Odometer’’ to ‘‘Trip A/ ‘‘TRIP A’’ and ‘‘TRIP B’’ by pressing Outside Temperature’’ to ‘‘Trip B/ When you turn the ignition switch to the SEL/RESET button on the Outside Temperature’’ to ‘‘Engine the ON (II) position, what you last steering wheel, or the Select/Reset Oil Life’’, and then back to the ‘‘Trip selected is displayed. knob in the instrument panel. A/Odometer’’ as shown in the next column.
72 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１６：２９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００７６
Multi-Information Display
To reset a trip meter, display it, and Outside Temperature The temperature sensor is in the press and hold the SEL/RESET front bumper. The temperature button or Select/Reset knob until the reading can be affected by heat number resets to ‘‘0.0.’’ When you reflection from the road surface, reset ‘‘Trip B’’ , ‘‘AVG. FUEL B’’ is engine heat, and the exhaust from also reset. If you reset ‘‘Trip A’’, surrounding traffic. This can cause Controls and Instruments ‘‘AVG. FUEL A’’ and ‘‘AVG. SPEED’’ an incorrect temperature reading willberesetatthesametime. when your speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h). When you start In the customizing mode, you can set your trip, the sensor is not fully ‘‘Trip A’’ and ‘‘AVG. FUEL A’’ to acclimatized, therefore it may take reset at the same time when you OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE several minutes until the proper refuel your vehicle (see page97 ). U.S.model is shown temperature is displayed.
This shows the outside Fahrenheit In certain weather conditions, temperature in U.S. models, and temperature readings near freezing Centigrade temperature in Canadian (32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is models. forming on the road surface.
You can adjust the outside temperature display (see page95 ).
73 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１６：３９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００７７
Multi-Information Display
Engine Oil Life Maintenance Messages
ENGINE OIL LIFE U.S.model is shown U.S.model is shown This shows the remaining life of the When the engine oil life reaches 15 %, Have your dealer do the indicated engine oil. It shows 100% after the the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUE maintenance as soon as you see this engine oil is replaced and the display SOON’’ and the code for the message, and have them reset the is reset. The engine oil life is maintenance items to be performed. display after completing the service. calculated based on engine operating conditions and accumulated engine When the engine oil life reaches 5 %, If you do not perform the indicated revolutions. For more information, the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUE maintenance or do not reset the see page266 . NOW’’ along with the same display, the message changes to maintenance items. ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ when the engine oil life becomes 0 %.
74 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１６：４６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００７８
Multi-Information Display
Thesemessagesappearinthemulti- System Messages information display each time you If there is a problem with your turn the ignition switch to the ON vehicle, for example, the engine oil (II) position. level is low or a door is not fully closed, the multi-information display For more information about will show you the problem. It does Controls and Instruments Maintenance Messages, see this by interrupting the current ‘‘Maintenance Minder ’’ on page message with one or more messages. 266 .
Also refer to page264 for important maintenance safety precautions. SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
These messages also trigger the appropriate indicator(s) on the instrument panel and cause the system message indicator to come on. The system message indicator does not go off until the problem(s) are corrected.
CONTINUED
75 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１６：５７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００７９
Multi-Information Display
When there are several warnings to be shown, the system switches the messages every 5 seconds. See page See page The message is shown until you 78 79 push the INFO button. To see the message again, press the INFO button, 5 seconds after the display disappears. See page See page 78 80 Here is a list of messages shown in the multi-information display:
See page See page 78 80
See page See page 79 81
See page See page 79 81
76
77
CONTINUED
83
e page See
121 82
e page See e page See
84 82
e page See e page See
83 82
e page See e page See
Instruments and Controls
83 81
e page See e page See
ut-nomto Display Multi-Information ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１７：０８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００８０ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１７：１６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００８１
Multi-Information Display
Fasten Seat Belt Door and Trunk Open Release Parking Lever
U.S. Canada
In addition to the Seat Belt Reminder If the trunk or any door is not closed If you start driving without releasing in the instrument panel, the multi- tightly, the display reminds you to the parking brake, the multi- information display interrupts the close the open trunk or the door(s) information display interrupts the current display and shows ‘‘FASTEN before you start driving. current display and shows SEAT BELT’’ or ‘‘PASSENGER ‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE.’’ FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ if either the This message continues, and a driver or a front passenger does not chime sounds, until you release the fasten their seat belt while driving. parking brake, or the vehicle speed This message remains displayed if slows down to less than 1.8 mph (3 you or your passenger ignores it and km/h). does not wear your seat belt while the vehicle is moving.
78 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１７：２４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００８２
Multi-Information Display
Remove Key Brake Fluid Low Tighten Fuel Cap
U.S. Canada ntuet n Controls and Instruments
If you leave the key in the ignition If the brake fluid level is at or below Ifthefuelfillcapismissingornot switch in the LOCK (0) or theMINmarkonthesideofthe tightened properly, you will see ACCESSORY (I) position and open brake fluid reservoir in the engine ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP.’’ Make sure the driver’s door, you will see compartment, you will see ‘‘BRAKE the fuel cap is installed and tightened ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’ in the display and FLUID LOW.’’ If you see this at least one click. hear a reminder beeper. message, have the brake system checked by your dealer (see page 288 ).
CONTINUED
79 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１７：３２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００８３
Multi-Information Display
The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message Fuel Low Washer Fluid Low should go off after tightening the fuel cap, turning the ignition switch off and on, then driving over 30 mph (48 km/h) for at least 45 seconds. Due to different driving conditions, it may take a few driving trips to make the message go off.
If a loose or missing fuel cap was not the cause of the ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message coming on, the message will turn off and the Malfunction Indicator Lamp will come on. If this happens, have your If the level of the fuel in the tank Canadian models only vehicle checked by your dealer as gets low, you will see ‘‘FUEL LOW’’ If the fluid level in the windshield soon as possible. in the multi-information display, and washer reservoir gets low, you will you must refuel soon. The low fuel see ‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ in the indicator in the instrument panel will multi-information display. also come on.
80 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１７：４２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００８４
Multi-Information Display
Passenger Side Airbag OffCheck VSA System Check Engine Oil Level
U.S. Canada ntuet n Controls and Instruments
If the passenger’s side airbag has If there is a problem with the vehicle If the engine oil is very low or has automatically shut off, you will see stability assist (VSA) system, you lost pressure, you will see ‘‘CHECK ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ will see ‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ in ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ in the multi- in the multi-information display. See the multi-information display. If you information display. You will also see page34 for more information. see this message, have the VSA the low oil pressure indicator in the system checked by your dealer (see instrument panel flashing or staying page255 ). on. If you see this message, you should take immediate action since serious engine damage is possible. Follow the procedure on page323 .
CONTINUED
81 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１７：４９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００８５
Multi-Information Display
Check Transmission Check ABS System Check Airbag System
Automatic transmission: If there is a problem in the anti-lock If there is a problem with your front If there is a problem with the brake system (ABS), you will see airbags, side airbags, passenger’s automatic transmission, you will see ‘‘CHECKABSSYSTEM’’inthe side airbag automatic cutoff system, ‘‘CHECK TRANSMISSION’’ in the multi-information display. If you see automatic seat belt tensioners, side multi-information display. Avoid this message, have your vehicle curtain airbags, driver’s seat position rapid acceleration, and have the checked by a dealer (see page253 ). sensor, or the front passenger’s transmission checked by a dealer as weight sensors, you will see soon as possible. ‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ in the multi-information display. Take your vehicle to a dealer as soon as possible(seepage34 ).
82
83
CONTINUED
information.
326 n e aefrmore for page See on.
324 h ntuetpnlwl locome also will panel instrument the yadae sepg ). page (see dealer a by
rk n rk ytmidctrin indicator system brake and brake rbe.Hv orvhcechecked vehicle your Have problem. oeinformation. more
324 nomto ipa.Teparking The display. information msinssesmyhv a have may systems emission en hre.Sepg for page See charged. being
RK YTM’i h multi- the in SYSTEM’’ BRAKE ipa,i en n fteengine’s the of one means it display, ipa,i en h atr snot is battery the means it display,
ytm o ilse‘‘CHECK see will you system, YTM’i h multi-information the in SYSTEM’’ YTM’i h multi-information the in SYSTEM’’
fteei rbe ihtebrake the with problem a is there If fyuse‘CEKEMISSION ‘‘CHECK see you If fyuse‘CEKCHARGING ‘‘CHECK see you If
Instruments and Controls
U.S. Canada
hc hrigSse hc msinSse hc rk System Brake Check System Emission Check System Charging Check
ut-nomto Display Multi-Information ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１７：５９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００８６
84
toreceiveormakephonecalls.
orcl hn oteHLadhow and HFL the to phone cell your
213 o ntutoso o olink to how on instructions for
ihti ytm ee opage to Refer system. this with
o l elpoe r compatible are phones cell all Not
hce yadealer. a by checked n h F ytmms elinked. be must system HFL the and
hsmsae aeyu vehicle your have message, this ouetesse,yu elphone cell your system, the use To oto operation. control
204 ut-nomto ipa.I o see you If display. multi-information phone. o nomto ntecruise the on information for
‘HC R YTM’i the in SYSTEM’’ DRL ‘‘CHECK ytmwtottuhn orcell your touching without system ae ilas oeo.Sepage See on. come also will panel
emhalgtscrut o ilsee will you circuit, headlight’s beam eil’ adFeLn (HFL) HandsFreeLink vehicle’s oto niao nteinstrument the in indicator Control
fteei rbe ntehigh the in problem a is there If rmyu elpoetruhyour through phone cell your from setthecruisecontrol.TheCruise
o a eev rmk phone-calls make or receive can You hsmsaecmso hnyou when on comes message This aainmdl only models Canadian
..mdli shown is model U.S.
rieCnrlHandsFreeLink Control Cruise hc R System DRL Check
TM
ut-nomto Display Multi-Information ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１８：０７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００８７ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１８：１７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００８８
Multi-Information Display
Customized Settings With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, press and hold the INFO button for more than 3 seconds. ‘‘CUSTOMIZE ENTRY’’ appears in the multi-information Controls and Instruments display. DRIVER’S ID
You can customize some vehicle If you use the key to unlock the control settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and driver’s door, the system cannot ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately. recognize either ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2.’’ In this case, when you To have the driver’s ID detected, try to enter the customizing mode, make sure you use your transmitter ‘‘DRIVER UNKNOWN to unlock the driver’s door. CUSTOMIZE IMPOSSIBLE’’ will be displayed, and you cannot customize some of the settings.
CONTINUED
85 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１８：２５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００８９
Multi-Information Display
The first customizing menu is: If you want to change any vehicle CHANGE SETTING control settings, select ‘‘CHANGE DEFAULT ALL SETTING,’’ and follow the instructions on page91 . EverytimeyoupresstheINFO button, the display cycles from If you do not make any changes, ‘‘CHANGE SETTING,’’ ‘‘DEFAULT select ‘‘EXIT,’’ the display returns to ALL,’’ ‘‘EXIT’’ and then back to normal display. ‘‘CHANGE SETTING.’’ Press the SEL/RESET button to enter your You can also use the Select/Reset selection. knob in the instrument panel. Turn AT model MT model the knob to select a setting and press If you want the settings as they were it to enter your selection. To change the settings, stop the when the vehicle left the factory, vehicle, and make sure to set the select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ as parking brake and put the described on page89 . transmission in Park (A/T) or neutral (M/T). If you try to enter the customizing mode while the vehicle is moving, the above message appears and you cannot change the settings.
86 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１８：３３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００９０
Multi-Information Display
Here are the settings you can CUSTOMIZE GROUP CUSTOMIZE MENU CUSTOMIZE SET UP customize in this mode: METER SETUP LANGUAGE ENGLISH＊ See page SELECTION FRENCH 93 Refer to pages in the next column SPANISH about the settings you want to ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. －～±°～＋5°F 0 F＊ 5°F See page customize. DISPLAY －～±°～＋3°C 0 C＊ 3°C 95 Controls and Instruments TRIP A & AVG. FUEL ON See page RESET with REFUEL OFF＊ 97 ELAP. TIME RESET IGN RESET＊ See page CONDITION TRIP A RESET 99 TRIP B RESET PRIMARY DISP INST. FUEL＊ See page SELECTION AVG. FUEL 101 RANGE ELAPSED TIME AVG. SPEED POSITION SETUP MEMORY POSITION ON＊ See page LINK OFF 103
＊ : Default setting
CONTINUED
87 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１８：３８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００９１
Multi-Information Display
LIGHTING SETUP INTERIOR LIGHT 15 sec See page DIMMING TIME 30 sec＊ 105 60 sec HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF 0sec See page TIMER 15 sec＊ 107 30 sec 60 sec DOOR · WINDOW DOOR LOCK MODE DRIVER DOOR＊ See page SETUP ALL DOORS 110 KEYLESS LOCK ON＊ See page ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OFF 112 SECURTY RELOCK 30 sec＊ See page TIMER 60 sec 114 90 sec WIPER SETUP FRONT WIPER ACTION WITH VEH SPD＊ See page INTERMITTENT 116
＊ : Default setting
88 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１８：４６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００９２
Multi-Information Display
DEFAULT ALL ntuet n Controls and Instruments
If you want to set the customizable If you want to cancel ‘‘DEFAULT To set the default settings, press the vehicle control settings to the default ALL,’’ press the SEL/RESET button INFO button until the display setting, press the INFO button on while ‘‘CANCEL’’ is shown. The changesasshownabove.Pressthe the steering wheel until ‘‘DEFAULT display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE SEL/RESET button to select ALL’’ is displayed. ENTRY.’’ ‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’
Press the SEL/RESET button to enter ‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’ You can change the display between ‘‘CANCEL,’’ ‘‘OK’’ and ‘‘EXIT’’ each time you press the INFO button. CONTINUED
89 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１８：５２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００９３
Multi-Information Display
When ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ is If ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ is not completed To exit ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ press the completed successfully, you will see successfully, you will see the above INFO button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ the above display for several seconds, display for several seconds, then the then press the SEL/RESET button. and the display will return to display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE ‘‘CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.’’ ENTRY.’’ Repeat the procedure to select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’
90 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１９：０１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００９４
Multi-Information Display
Change Setting You can customize some of the vehicle control settings to your preference. Here are the settings you can customize: ntuet n Controls and Instruments METER SETUP POSITION SETUP LIGHTING SETUP DOOR/WINDOW SETUP WIPER SETUP
While the multi-information display is showing ‘‘CHANGE SETTING,’’ press the SEL/RESET button. The display will start showing the initial ‘‘CUSTOMIZE GROUP.’’ Each time you press the INFO button, the display changes as shown in the next column. Press the INFO button until you see the setup you want to customize, and press the SEL/ RESET button to enter your selection. : Press SEL/RESET Button. : Press the INFO Button.
91 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１９：１０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００９５
Multi-Information Display
Meter Setup There are five custom settings in the Meter Setup:
LANGUAGE SELECTION ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY TRIP A & AVG. FUEL A RESET with REFUEL ELAP. TIME RESET CONDITION PRIMARY DISP SELECTION
While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is displayed, press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel. Then, press the INFO button repeatedly. Each time you press the INFO button, the display changes as shown.
To customize a setting, press the INFO button repeatedly until you see the setting you want to customize, and press the SEL/RESET button. Then follow the procedures described on the following pages. : Press the INFO Button.
92 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１９：１７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００９６
Multi-Information Display
Language Selection ntuet n Controls and Instruments
: Press the INFO Button. While the multi-information display There are three selectable languages, Select the language you want by is showing ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press English, French, and Spanish. Each pressing the INFO button, and press the SEL/RESET button on the time you press the INFO button, the the SEL/RESET button to enter steering wheel. The display changes display changes as shown. your selection. to ‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION.’’ Press the SEL/RESET button again to enter the language selection mode.
CONTINUED
93 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１９：２５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００９７
Multi-Information Display
When language selection is If you fail to select a language To exit ‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION,’’ successfully completed, the display properly, you will see the above press the INFO button repeatedly changes to the screen shown above display for several seconds, then the until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the for several seconds, then goes back display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE SEL/RESET button. The display to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ MENU.’’ Repeat the setup. goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
All the messages in the multi- information display will be in the language you selected.
94 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１９：３１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００９８
Multi-Information Display
Adjust Outside Temp. Display If you find that the temperature reading is always a few degrees below or above the actual temperature, adjust it as described on the following columns. Controls and Instruments
U.S. model is shown
While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The shows ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press the display changes as shown above. SEL/RESET button on the steering The highlighted number is the wheel. The display changes to the current adjustment above or below ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press the the outside temperature. Press the INFO button once, and you will see INFO button repeatedly until the ‘‘ADJUST. OUTSIDE TEMP. appropriate number appears, then DISPLAY’’ as shown above. press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.
CONTINUED
95 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１９：３７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ００９９
Multi-Information Display
U.S. model is shown
When your selection is successfully If you fail to enter the desired To exit ‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. entered, you will see the above adjustment properly, you will see the DISPLAY,’’ press the INFO button display for several seconds, and then above display for several seconds, until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ and press the the display goes back to then the display goes back to SEL/RESET button. The display ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Repeat the goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ adjustment.
96 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１９：４４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１００
Multi-Information Display
Trip A & Avg. Fuel Reset with Refuel To reset ‘‘Trip A’’ and ‘‘AVG. FUEL A’’ to reset every time you refuel your vehicle, follow the procedure described from the next column. ntuet n Controls and Instruments
While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The shows ‘‘METER SETUP’’ press the display changes as shown above. SEL/RESET button on the steering The lower segment changes wheel. The display changes to between ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’ each time ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press the you press the INFO button. Enter INFO button repeatedly until you see your selection by pressing the SEL/ ‘‘TRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESET RESET button. WITH REFUEL’’ in the lower segment as shown above.
CONTINUED
97 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１９：４９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１０１
Multi-Information Display
When your selection is successfully If you fail to enter your selection, To exit ‘‘TRIP A & AVG. FUEL entered, you will see the above you will see the above display for WITH REFUEL,’’ press the INFO display for several seconds, and then several seconds, then the display button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ and the display goes back to goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ press the SEL/RESET button. The ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Repeat the setup. display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
98 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：１９：５６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１０２
Multi-Information Display
Elap. Time Reset Condition ‘‘ELAPSED TIME’’ is the driving time since you last reset the trip computer. You can customize the condition when the ‘‘ELAPSED TIME’’ is reset. Controls and Instruments
When the ‘‘ELAP. TIME RESET CONDITION’’ is completed, the ‘‘ELAPSED TIME’’ is reset regardless of the condition you selected.
While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The shows ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press the display changes as shown above. SEL/RESET button on the steering The lower segment changes wheel. The display changes to the between ‘‘IGN RESET,’’ ‘‘TRIP A ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press the RESET’’ and ‘‘TRIP B RESET’’ each INFO button repeatedly until you see time you press the INFO button. ‘‘ELAP. TIME RESET Enter your selection by pressing the CONDITION’’ in the lower segment SEL/RESET button. as shown above.
CONTINUED
99 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２０：０２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１０３
Multi-Information Display
When your selection is successfully If you fail to enter your selection, To exit ‘‘ELAP. TIME RESET entered, you will see the above you will see the above display for CONDITION,’’ press the INFO display for several seconds, and then several seconds, then the display button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ and the display goes back to goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ press the SEL/RESET button. The ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Repeat the setup. display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
100 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２０：０８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１０４
Multi-Information Display
Primary Disp Selection When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the primary display of the trip computer always shows ‘‘INST. MPG’’ (U.S. models) or ‘‘INST. L/100 km’’ (Canadian Controls and Instruments models) in default setting. You can customize this setting to your liking in following procedure.
While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The shows ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press the display changes as shown above. SEL/RESET button on the steering The lower segment changes from wheel. Press the INFO button until ‘‘INST. FUEL,’’ to ‘‘AVG. FUEL,’’ to you see ‘‘PRIMARY DISP ‘‘RANGE,’’ to ‘‘ELAPSED TIME,’’ SELECTION’’ as shown above. then to ‘‘AVG. SPEED’’ each time you press the INFO button. Enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.
CONTINUED
101 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２０：１４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１０５
Multi-Information Display
When your selection is successfully If you fail to enter your selection, To exit ‘‘PRIMARY DISP entered, you will see the above you will see the above display for SELECTION,’’ press the INFO display for several seconds, and then several seconds, then the display button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ and the display goes back to goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ press the SEL/RESET button. The ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Repeat the setup. display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
102 ０５／１０／０４ １５：３０：３７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１０６
Multi-Information Display
Position Setup Memory Position Link If ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ is ‘‘ON,’’ the driver’s seat moves to the positionstoredinthememorywhen you open the driver’s door, using the remote transmitter. Controls and Instruments
Refer to page142 for setting the seat position memory. Also refer to page 131 forremotetransmitteruse.
While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The shows ‘‘POSITION SETUP,’’ press display changes as shown above. the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel. The display changes Select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF ’’ by pressing to ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ as the INFO button, and enter your shown above. selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.
CONTINUED
103 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２０：２８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１０７
Multi-Information Display
When your selection is entered, you If you fail to enter your selection, To exit ‘‘MEMORY POSITION will see the above display for several you will see the above display for LINK,’’ press the INFO button until seconds, then the display goes back several seconds, and the display goes you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/ to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ RESET button. The display goes Repeat the setup. back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
104 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２０：３９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１０８
Multi-Information Display
Lighting Setup Interior Light Dimming Time There are two custom settings in the Lighting Setup:
INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME Controls and Instruments HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
While the ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is displayed, press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel. Each time you press the INFO button, the display changes between ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME’’ and ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO The interior lights fade out when you Press the SEL/RESET button. The OFF TIMER.’’ To make your close all doors. You can change the display changes as shown above. selection, press the SEL/RESET time that the interior lights fade out. button. Each time you press the INFO While the multi-information display button, the highlighted number shows ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP,’’ press changes from ‘‘15 sec,’’ to ‘‘30 sec,’’ the SEL/RESET button on the andthento‘‘60sec.’’Tomakeyour steering wheel. The display changes selection, press the SEL/RESET to ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING button. TIME’’ as shown above.
CONTINUED
105 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２０：４４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１０９
Multi-Information Display
When your selection is entered, you If you fail to enter your selection, To exit ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT will see the above display for several you will see the above display for DIMMING TIME,’’ press the INFO seconds, and then the display goes several seconds, and the display goes button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ press the SEL/RESET button. The Repeat the setup. display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
106 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２０：５３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１１０
Multi-Information Display
Headlight Auto Off Timer ntuet n Controls and Instruments
While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The Press the INFO button repeatedly shows ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP,’’ press display changes as shown above. until the desired time appears, then the SEL/RESET button on the press the SEL/RESET button to steering wheel. Then press the Each time you press the INFO enter your selection. INFO button to display button, the highlighted number ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’ changes from ‘‘0 sec,’’ to ‘‘15 sec,’’ to When your selection is entered, you as shown above. ‘‘30 sec,’’ and then to ‘‘60 sec.’’ will see the above display for several seconds, and then the display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
CONTINUED
107 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２０：５８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１１１
Multi-Information Display
The headlights, parking lights, taillights, and license plate lights turn off after the selected time when you remove the key from the ignition switch and close the driver’s door.
If you fail to enter your selection, To exit ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF you will see the above display for TIMER,’’ press the INFO button several seconds, then the display until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ SEL/RESET button. The display Repeat the setup. goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
108 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２１：０５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１１２
Multi-Information Display
Door · Window Setup There are three custom settings in the Door · Window Setup:
DOOR LOCK MODE KEYLESS LOCK Controls and Instruments ACKNOWLEDGEMENT SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
While the multi-information display shows ‘‘DOOR · WINDOW SETUP,’’ press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel. Each time you press the INFO button, the display changesasshowninthenext column.
To customize a setting, press the INFO button repeatedly until you see the setting you want to customize, and press the SEL/RESET button. Then follow the procedures described on the following pages. : Press the INFO Button.
CONTINUED
109 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２１：１２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１１３
Multi-Information Display
Door Lock Mode In default setting, if you push the UNLOCK button once on the remote transmitter or turn the key clockwise in the driver’s door lock, only the driver’s door unlocks.
You can select whether only the driver’s door unlocks or all the doors unlock in ‘‘DOOR LOCK MODE.’’
While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The is showing ‘‘DOOR · WINDOW display changes as shown above. SETUP,’’ press the SEL/RESET buttononthesteeringwheel.The Select ‘‘DRIVER DOOR’’ or ‘‘ALL display changes to ‘‘DOOR LOCK DOORS’’ by pressing the INFO MODE’’ as shown above. button, and enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
110 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２１：１８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１１４
Multi-Information Display ntuet n Controls and Instruments
When your selection is successfully If you fail to enter your selection, To exit ‘‘DOOR LOCK MODE,’’ entered, you will see the above you will see the above display for press the INFO button until you see display for several seconds, and then several seconds, then the display ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESET the display goes back to goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ button. The display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Repeat the setup. ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
CONTINUED
111 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２１：２５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１１５
Multi-Information Display
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment When you push the LOCK button on the remote transmitter, the doors and the trunk are set, and some exterior lights flash, and a beeper sounds when you push the LOCK button again within 5 seconds, and the security system has set and a horn sounds (see page203 ). You can customize the exterior lights not to flash and the beeper not to sound.
While the multi-information display Press SEL/RESET button, then shows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’ press the INFO button. press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel. Then press the Each time you press the INFO INFO button repeatedly until you see button, the display changes to ‘‘ON,’’ ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK to ‘‘OFF,’’ then to ‘‘EXIT.’’ ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ as shown above. Select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing the INFO button, and enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.
112 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２１：３１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１１６
Multi-Information Display ntuet n Controls and Instruments
When your selection is entered, you If you fail to enter your selection, To exit ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK will see the above display for several you will see the above display for ACKNOWLEDGMENT,’’ press the seconds, and then the display several seconds, and the display goes INFO button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ changes to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ then press the SEL/RESET button. Repeat the setup. The display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
CONTINUED
113 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２１：３８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１１７
Multi-Information Display
Security Relock Timer If you unlock the doors with the remote transmitter, but do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock and the security system sets.
You can change this relock time from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.
While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button, then shows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’ press the INFO button. press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel. Then press the Each time you press the INFO INFO button repeatedly until you see button, the time changes from ‘‘30 ‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ as sec,’’ to ‘‘60 sec,’’ and then to ‘‘90 sec.’’ shown above.
114 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２１：４５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１１８
Multi-Information Display ntuet n Controls and Instruments
Select the desired relock time by If you fail to enter your selection, To exit ‘‘SECURITY RELOCK pressing the INFO button, and enter you will see the above display for TIMER,’’ press the INFO button your selection by pressing the SEL/ several seconds, and the display goes until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the RESET button. back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ SEL/RESET button. The display Repeat the setup. goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ When your selection is entered, you will see the above display for several seconds, and then the display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
115 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２１：５２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１１９
Multi-Information Display
Wiper Setup Front Wiper Action When ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ is shown in the multi-information display, the action of the windshield wipers can be changed. To do this, refer to the following procedure.
With ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ shown in the Each time you press the INFO multi-information display, press the button, the display changes from SEL/RESET button on the steering ‘‘WITH VEH SPD,’’ to wheel. The display changes to ‘‘INTERMITTENT,’’ and then to ‘‘FRONT WIPER ACTION’’ as ‘‘EXIT.’’ shown above. Press the INFO button to select Press the SEL/RESET button, then ‘‘WITH VEH SPD’’ or press the INFO button. ‘‘INTERMITTENT,’’ and enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.
116 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２１：５８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１２０
Multi-Information Display ntuet n Controls and Instruments
If you set the front wiper action to seconds, and then the display goes To exit ‘‘FRONT WIPER ACTION,’’ ‘‘WITH VEH SPD,’’ the front wipers back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ press the INFO button until you see run intermittently and the wiper ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESET interval is varied automatically If you fail to enter your selection, button. The display goes back to according to the vehicle’s speed you will see the above display for ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ when the wiper switch is in the several seconds, and the display goes ‘‘INT’’position. If you set it to back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ ‘‘INTERMITTENT,’’ the wipers run Repeat the setup. at regular intervals.
When your selection is entered, you will see the above display for several
117 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２２：０６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１２１
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
HEADLIGHTS/FOG LIGHTS/ HORN＊1 INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS WINDSHIELD WIPERS/ TURN SIGNALS (P.120-121) CONTROL (P.122) WASHERS (P.119)
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON (P.123) REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS CRUISE CONTROL (P.200) BUTTONS (P.204) MOONROOF SWITCH REAR WINDOW (P.150) DEFOGGER BUTTON (P.123)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) OFF SWITCH (P.256) STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT LEVER (P.124) HANDSFREE LINKTM BUTTONS/ MULTI-INFORMATION VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS＊2 (P.212) BUTTONS(P.70, 72) Vehicle without navigation system is shown. SEAT HEATER SWITCHES (P.137)
＊1: To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘Acura’’ logo. ＊2: Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual. 118 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２２：１５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１２２
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wiper Push the right lever up or down to LO － The wipers run at low speed. select a position. HI － The wipers run at high speed. MIST － The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever. Windshield Washer － Pull the wiper control lever toward you, and Controls and Instruments OFF － The wipers are not activated. hold it. The washers spray until you release the lever. The wipers run at INT － The length of the wiper low speed, then complete one more interval is varied automatically sweep after you release the lever. according to the vehicle’s speed. Vary the delay by turning the INT TIME ring. If you turn it to the shortest delay, the wipers will 1. MIST change to low speed operation when 2. OFF the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph 3. INT－ Intermittent (20 km/h). 4. LO－ Low speed 5. HI－ High speed To change the ‘‘FRONT WIPER 6.Windshield washers ACTION’’ setting, see page 116 .
119 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２２：２３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１２３
Turn Signal, Headlights
Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal－－Push down on the Headlights Turning the switch left lever to signal a left turn and up on the left lever to the to signal a right turn. To signal a lane ‘‘ ’’position turns on the parking change, push lightly on the lever in lights, taillights, instrument panel the proper direction and hold it. The lights, side-marker lights, and rear lever will return to center when you license plate lights. release it or complete a turn. Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the headlights.
When the light switch is in the ‘‘ ’’ or the ‘‘ ’’ position, the Lights On indicator comes on as a reminder. This indicator stays on if 1. Turn signal you leave the light switch on and 2. Off turn the ignition switch to the 3. Parking and interior lights ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) 4. Headlights position. 5. High beams 6. Flashhighbeams If you leave the lights on with the 7. Fog lights off key removed from the ignition 8. Fog lights on switch, you will hear a reminder beeper when you open the driver’s door.
120 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２２：３３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１２４
Headlights, Automatic Lighting Off Feature, Daytime Running Lights
High Beams － To switch from low Automatic Lighting Off Feature The lights will turn on again when beams to high beams, push the left This feature turns off the headlights, you unlock or open the driver’s door. lever forward until you hear a click. parking lights, taillights, and license If you unlock the door, but do not The high beam indicator will come plate lights within 15 seconds of open it within 15 seconds, the lights on (see page66 ). Pull it back to removing the key from the ignition will go off. With the driver’s door return to low beams. To flash the switch and closing the driver’s door. open, you will hear a Lights-On Controls and Instruments high beams, pull the lever back reminder beeper. lightly, then release it. The high You can change this 15 second timer beams will stay on as long as you to 0, 30, or 60 seconds (see page Daytime Running Lights hold the lever back. 107 ). (Canadian Models) With the headlight switch in the off Fog Lights This feature activates if you leave or position, the high beam Turn the fog lights on and off by the headlight switch in the or headlights and the high beam turning the switch next to the position, remove the key, then indicator come on with reduced headlight switch. open and close the driver’s door. brightness when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) You can use the fog lights only when If you remove the key from the position and release the parking the headlights are on low beam. ignition switch with the headlight brake. They remain on until you turn They will go off when you turn the switch on, but do not open the door the ignition switch off, even if you headlights off or onto high beam. and get out, the lights will turn off set the parking brake. after 10 minutes.
CONTINUED
121 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２２：４１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１２５
Daytime Running Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness
The headlights revert to normal Instrument Panel Brightness operation when you turn them on with the switch. U.S. model is shown
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL SYSTEM’’ message in the multi- information display, there is a problem in the high beam headlight’s circuit. Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
When the multi-information display shows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, the SELECT/RESET KNOB BRIGHTNESS LEVEL daytime running lights are off. Follow the procedure in the previous The knob on the instrument panel The level of brightness is shown in page to turn them on. controls the brightness of the instru- the multi-information display while ment panel lights. Turn the knob to you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds adjust the brightness. after you finish adjusting.
To reduce glare at night, the instru- ment panel illumination dims when you turn the light switch to or . Turning the Select/Reset knob fully to the right until you hear a click will cancel the reduced bright- ness.
122 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２２：４８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１２６
Hazard Warning, Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger ntuet n Controls and Instruments
Without navigation system With navigation system Push the button between the center The rear window defogger will clear Make sure the rear window is clear vents to turn on the hazard warning fog, frost, and thin ice from the and you have good visibility before lights (four-way flashers). This window. Push the defogger button to starting to drive. causes all four outside turn signal turn it on and off. The indicator lights and both turn signal indicators above the button comes on to show The defogger and antenna wires on in the instrument panel to flash. Use the defogger is on. If you do not turn the inside of the rear window can be the hazard warning lights if you need it off, the defogger will shut itself off accidentally damaged. When to park in a dangerous area near after about 35 minutes. It also shuts cleaning the glass, always wipe side heavy traffic, or if your vehicle is off when you turn off the ignition to side. disabled. switch. You have to turn the defogger on again when you restart the vehicle.
123 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２２：５５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１２７
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make any steering wheel adjustment 3. Push the lever up to lock the before you start driving. steering wheel in that position.
4. Make sure you have securely locked the steering wheel in place Adjusting the steering wheel by trying to move it up, down, in, position while driving may and out. cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped. 1. Push the lever under the steering column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and in or out to the desired position. Make sure you can see the instrument panel gauges and the indicator lights.
124 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２３：０３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１２８
Keys and Locks
KEY MASTER VALET KEY Youshouldhavereceivedakey Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy NUMBER KEY (LIGHT GREY) number tag with your keys. You will objects on them. TAG (BLACK) need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use Keep the keys away from liquids. only Acura-approved key blanks. If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth. Controls and Instruments These keys contain electronic circuits that are activated by the The keys do not contain batteries. immobilizer system. They will not Do not try to take them apart. work to start the engine if the circuits are damaged. Remote Transmitter Your vehicle also comes with two Protect the keys from direct remote transmitters; see page The master key fits all the locks on sunlight, high temperature, and 130 for an explanation of how to your vehicle. The valet key works high humidity. operation. only in the ignition and the door locks. You can keep the trunk release handle, rear seat trunk access, and glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and the valet key at a parking facility.
125 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２３：１１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１２９
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects If the system repeatedly does not As required by the FCC: your vehicle from theft. If an recognize the coding of your key, This device complies with Part 15 of the improperly-coded key (or other contact your dealer. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the device) is used, the engine will not following two conditions: (1) This device start. Do not attempt to alter this system may not cause harmful interference, and or add other devices to it. Electrical (2) this device must accept any When you turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make interference received, including the ON (II) position, the immobilizer your vehicle undrivable. interference that may cause undesired system indicator should come on for operation. a few seconds, then go off. If the If you lose your key and you cannot indicator starts to blink, it means the start the engine, contact your dealer. Changes or modifications not expressly system does not recognize the approved by the party responsible for coding of the key. Turn the ignition compliance could void the user’s switch to the LOCK (0) position, authority to operate the equipment. remove the key, reinsert it, and turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) This device complies with Industry position again. Canada Standard RSS-210. The system may not recognize your Operation is subject to the following two key’s coding if another immobilizer conditions: (1) this device may not cause key or other metal object (i.e. key interference, and (2) this device must fob) is near the ignition switch when accept any interference that may cause you insert the key. undesired operation of the device.
126 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２３：１９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１３０
Ignition Switch
If the front wheels are turned, the You will hear a reminder beeper if anti-theft lock may make it difficult you leave the key in the ignition to turn the key. Firmly turn the switch in the LOCK (0) or the steering wheel to the left or right as ACCESSORY (I) position and open you turn the key. thedriver’sdoor.Removethekeyto turn off the beeper. Controls and Instruments ACCESSORY (I) － You can operate the audio system and the If your vehicle has an automatic accessory power sockets in this transmission, the shift lever must be position. in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch. ON (II) － This is the normal key position when driving. Several of the The ignition switch has four indicators on the instrument panel positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY come on as a test when you turn the Removing the key from the (I), ON (II), and START (III). ignition switch from the ignition switch while driving ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II) locks the steering. This can LOCK (0) － You can insert or position. cause you to lose control of the remove the key only in this position. vehicle. To turn the key, you must push the START (III) － Use this position key in slightly. If your vehicle has an only to start the engine. The switch Remove the key from the automatic transmission, the shift returns to the ON (II) position when ignition switch only when lever must also be in park. you let go of the key. parked.
127 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２３：２７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１３１
Door Locks
LOCK TAB All doors can be locked from the Power Door Locks outsidebyusingthekeyinthe driver’s door. To unlock only the DRIVER’S DOOR Lock driver’s door or all doors (depending on the ‘‘DOOR LOCK MODE’’ setting), insert the key, turn the key, Unlock and release it. The remaining doors unlock when you turn the key a second time within a few seconds. To change this setting, see page110 .
Youcanopenorclosethewindows by using the key in the driver’s door MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH Each door has a lock tab on the top. (see page149 ). Push the tab down to lock the door Each front door has a master door and pull it up to unlock. lock switch. Either switch locks and unlocks all doors. On the driver’s To lock the passenger’s door when door, push the top of the master getting out of the vehicle, push the door lock switch to lock all doors. lock tab down and close the door. To Push the bottom to unlock them. lock the driver’s door, remove the key from the ignition switch and push the lock tab down or push the top of the master switch, then close the door.
128 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２３：３４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１３２
Door Locks, Childproof Door Locks
Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks With the driver’s door open and the MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH key in the ignition, both master door Unlock lock switches are disabled. You will Unlock see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’ message in the multi-information display (see Controls and Instruments page79 ). If you try to lock an open driver’s door by pushing in the lock Lock Lock tab, all doors will unlock when you close the driver’s door.
FRONT PASSENGER’S DOOR On the front passenger’s door, push The childproof door locks are the master door lock switch down to designed to prevent children seated lock the all doors, and up to unlock in the rear from accidentally opening them. the rear doors. Each rear door has a lock lever near the edge. With the lever in the LOCK position, the door cannot be opened from inside regardless of the position of the lock tab. To open the door, pull the lock tab up, and use the outside door handle.
129 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２３：４１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１３３
Remote Transmitter
closed. UNLOCK － Pressthisbuttononce LED LOCK BUTTON to unlock the driver’s door or all the To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK doors (depending on the ‘‘DOOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ setting, LOCK MODE’’ setting). Press it see page112 . twice to unlock the other doors. TRUNK Some exterior lights will flash twice RELEASE You can open and close all power each time you press the button. BUTTON UNLOCK windows from outside the vehicle The ceiling light (if the ceiling light BUTTON with the key. With the remote switch is in the Door Activated transmitter, you can open the position) will come on when you PANIC windows. Refer to Power Windows press the UNLOCK button. If you do BUTTON on page149 . not open any doors within 30 seconds (or whatever setting the When the key is in the ignition ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING switch, the functions of each button TIME’’issetto),thelightfadesout. are disabled. If you relock the doors with the LOCK － Press this button once to remote transmitter before 30 lock all doors. Some exterior lights seconds have elapsed, the light will will flash. When you push LOCK go off immediately. twice within 5 seconds, you will hear a horn (depending on the ‘‘KEYLESS To change the ‘‘DOOR LOCK LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ MODE’’ setting, see page110 . setting) to verify that the doors are locked and the security system has set. The Lock button will not work this way if any door is not fully
130 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２３：４９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１３４
Remote Transmitter
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT PANIC － Pressthisbuttonfor Recalling a Memorized Driving DIMMING TIME,’’ see page105 . about 1 second to attract attention; Position thehornwillsoundandtheexterior If you unlock the doors with the lights will flash for about 30 seconds. With Driver 1 With Driver 2 remote transmitter, but do not open To cancel panic mode, press any anydoorswithin30seconds,the other button on the remote Controls and Instruments doors automatically relock and the transmitter, or turn the ignition security system sets. To change this switch to the ON (II) position. setting, refer to ‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ on page114 . TRUNK － Pressthisbuttonfor about 1 second to open the trunk. You cannot open the trunk with the remote transmitter if the trunk main switch is turned off (see page136 ).
Each remote transmitter also activates the Driving Position Memory System and changes the ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ setting according to that remote (see page142 ).
CONTINUED
131 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２３：５８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１３５
Remote Transmitter
When you open the driver’s door The driving position memory Remote Transmitter Care after unlocking it with the remote activated (Driver 1, Driver 2) is Avoid dropping or throwing the transmitter, you will hear a beep shownonthebackofeach transmitter. (depending on the ‘‘KEYLESS transmitter. Make sure you store LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ your desired driving position in the Protect the transmitter from setting see page112 ). The driver’s memory that is activated by the extreme temperature. seat move to the positions stored in transmitter you normally carry. that memory location. You will hear Do not immerse the transmitter in two beeps when the movement is You can turn off this system any liquid. completed. activation. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same If you lose a transmitter, the To stop the system’s automatic time. The LED in the remote replacement needs to be adjustment, do any of these actions: transmitter will blink twice. Then reprogrammed by your dealer. Press any button on the driver’s release the buttons. Doing this also door: MEMO, memory button 1 or cancels the ‘‘MEMORY POSITION 2. LINK’’ setting for that remote and Push any of the adjustment restores the default settings. switches for the seat. Shift out of Park (A/T). To turn it back on, repeat this procedure. The LED will come on for 1 second to indicate the feature has been turned on.
132 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２４：１０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１３６
Remote Transmitter
Replacing the Transmitter Battery If it takes several pushes on the button to lock or unlock the doors, replace the battery as soon as possible. BATTERY ntuet n Controls and Instruments Battery type: CR2025
To replace the battery: 2. Remove the old battery and note the polarity. Make sure the 1. Place a cloth on the edge of the polarity of the new battery is the transmitter, and remove the upper same (－ side facing up), then half by carefully prying on the insert it in the transmitter. edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver. 3. Snapthetwohalvesofthe transmitter case back together.
CONTINUED
133
134
neie prto ftedevice. the of operation undesired
cetayitreec htmycause may that interference any accept
nefrne n 2 hsdvc must device this (2) and interference,
odtos 1 hsdvc a o cause not may device this (1) conditions:
prto ssbett h olwn two following the to subject is Operation
aaaSadr RSS-210. Standard Canada
hsdvc opiswt Industry with complies device This
uhrt ooeaeteequipment. the operate to authority
opinecudvi h user’s the void could compliance
prvdb h at epnil for responsible party the by approved
hne rmdfctosntexpressly not modifications or Changes
operation.
nefrneta a as undesired cause may that interference
nefrnercie,including received, interference
2 hsdvc utacp any accept must device this (2)
a o as amu nefrne and interference, harmful cause not may
olwn w odtos 1 hsdevice This (1) conditions: two following
C ue.Oeaini ujc othe to subject is Operation rules. FCC
hsdvc opiswt at1 fthe of 15 Part with complies device This
srqie yteFCC: the by required As
eoeTransmitter Remote ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２４：１４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１３７ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２４：２４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１３８
Trunk
Pull ntuet n Controls and Instruments
TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH TRUNK RELEASE LEVER MASTER KEY Youcanopenthetrunkinanyof To close the trunk, press down on To protect items in the trunk when three ways: the trunk lid. you need to give the key to someone else: Pull up on the trunk release lever See page237 for cargo loading and located to the left of the driver’s weight limit information. Keep the 1. Lockthetrunkreleaseleverwith seat. trunk lid closed at all times while the master key. Also make sure Press and hold the trunk release driving to avoid damaging the lid, the rear seat is not folded down button on the remote transmitter. and to prevent exhaust gas from (see page140 ). If the doors are unlocked, press getting into the interior. See Carbon thetrunkreleaseswitchonthe Monoxide Hazard on page56 . 2. Give the person the valet key. trunk lid.
CONTINUED
135 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２４：３３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１３９
Trunk
Emergency Trunk OpenerTo open the trunk, push the release Trunk Main Switch lever to the left. TRUNK RELEASE LEVER Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature.
For more information about child safety, see page41 .
As a safety feature, your vehicle has To protect items in the trunk, you a release lever on the trunk latch so can disable the trunk-release lever the trunk can be opened from the on the left of the driver’s seat, the inside. trunk-release switch on the trunk lid, andthetrunk-releasebuttononthe remote by turning off the trunk main switch in the glove box and locking the glove box. Make sure the rear seat is not folded down. If you need to give the key to someone else, give them the valet key.
136 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２４：４０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１４０
Seat Heaters
In HI, the heater turns off when the Follow these precautions whenever seat gets warm, and turns back on you use the seat heaters: after the seat temperature drops. Use the HI setting only to heat the In LO, the heater runs continuously. seats quickly, because it draws It does not cycle with temperature large amounts of current from the Controls and Instruments changes. battery.
If the engine is left idling for an extended period, do not use the seat heaters even on the LO SEAT HEATER SWITCHES setting. It can weaken the battery, causing hard starting. Both front seats are equipped with seat heaters. The passenger seat only has heaters in the seat bottom because of the side airbag system. The ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position to use the heaters. Push the top of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat up the seat. After the seat reaches a comfortable temperature, select LO by pushing the bottom of the switch. This will keep the seat warm.
137
138
backward.
nl owr or forward angle
dut h seat-back the Adjusts
seat.
position. asso oesthe lowers or Raises
akadutlyufn suitable a find you until backward etbc angle. back seat rvrssa only: seat Driver’s
epmvn h ee owr or forward lever the moving Keep h hr etclsic dut the adjusts switch vertical short The
etbc owr rbackward. or forward seat-back ntedrcinyumv h switch. the move you direction the in rdown. or
h ee ntergtsd fthe of side right the on lever the ietos h etbto adjusts bottom seat The directions. h ero h etup seat the of rear the
ocag h ubrspot move support, lumbar the change To dut h etbto nseveral in bottom seat the adjusts etu rdw and down or up seat
oigteln oiotlswitch horizontal long the Moving oe h rn fthe of front the Moves
rvrssa only: seat Driver’s
driving.
l etajsmnsbfr o start you before adjustments seat all owr n backward. and forward
giinsic naypsto.Make position. any in switch ignition oe h seat the Moves
o a duttesaswt the with seats the adjust can You
usd deo ahsa bottom. seat each of edge outside
dutbefotsasaeo the on are seats front adjustable
h otosfrtepower the for controls The
rprypsto et n seat-backs. and seats position properly
nomto n annsaothwto how about warnings and information
－ 315 13 e ae o motn safety important for pages See
oe etAjsmn rvrsLma Support Lumbar Driver’s Adjustment Seat Power
Seats ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２４：５２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１４１
139
CONTINUED
h etan down. restraint the
ees utnsdwy,adpush and sideways, button release
back. olwrtersrit uhthe push restraint, the lower To
n ultersritoto h seat- the of out restraint the pull and hl rvn.T as t ulupward. pull it, raise To driving. while etan shg spossible. as high as restraint
twl o uhterlaebutton release the Push go. will it etan.D o tep oajs it adjust to attempt not Do restraint. alrpro hudajs the adjust should person taller
laigo ear uli pa a as far as up it pull repair, or cleaning o edbt ad oajs the adjust to hands both need You gis h etro h etan.A restraint. the of center the against
ormv edrsritfor restraint head a remove To h edrsrit dutfrheight. for adjust restraints head The h ako h cuatsha rests head occupant’s the of back the
fetv hnyuajs hmso them adjust you when effective
EES BUTTON RELEASE n te nuis hyaemost are They injuries. other and EES BUTTON RELEASE
n orpsegr rmwhiplash from passengers your and
h edrsrit eppoetyou protect help restraints head The
h usd oiin ftera seat. rear the of positions outside the
etanso h rn et n on and seats front the on restraints orvhcehsajsal head adjustable has vehicle Your
Instruments and Controls
rprypsto h edrestraints. head the position properly
nomto n ann bu o to how about warning a and information
e aefripratsafety important for page See 15
EROTIEPOSITION OUTSIDE REAR FRONT edRestraints Head
Seats ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２５：００ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１４２ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２５：０６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１４３
Seats
Folding Rear Seat The back of the rear seat folds down to give you direct access to the trunk. Each side folds down separately. With only half the seat folded, you can still carry a passenger in the back seat. The seat-back can be released from inside the vehicle or inside the trunk. GUIDE
MASTER KEY CENTER SHOULDER BELT To fold down either side of the seat- When storing cargo, you can move back from inside the vehicle, insert therearcentershoulderbeltoutof the master key in the lock on the the way by removing the belt from rear shelf. To fold down the driver’s the guide. side, turn the key clockwise, pull down the top of the seat-back, then release the key. To fold down the passenger’s side, turn the key counterclockwise and perform the same procedure.
140 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２５：１５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１４４
Seats
Make sure that the folded seat-back Do not put any heavy items on the does not interfere with the front seat-back when it is folded. passenger’s seat-back. This will cause the front passenger’s weight Make sure all items in the trunk, or sensors to work improperly (see items extending through the opening page30 ). Also check the passenger into the back seat, are secured. Controls and Instruments airbag off indicator to assure proper Looseitemscanflyforwardand operation of the passenger’s cause injury if you have to brake advanced front airbag. hard. SeeCarrying Cargo on page 236 . Make sure all rear shoulder belts are RELEASE LOOP positioned in front of the rear seat- Never drive with the seat-back back, and the center shoulder belt is folded down and the trunk lid open. To release the seat-back from inside re-positioned in the guide whenever SeeCarbon Monoxide Hazard on the trunk, pull the release loop under the seat-back is in its upright position. page56 . the trunk panel. Be sure there are no twists in the Push the seat-back down, then let go center shoulder belt. of the release.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it firmly against the trunk panel. Make sure it is latched in place by pulling on the top of the seat.
141 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２５：２４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１４５
Driving Position Memory System
Your vehicle has a memory feature Storing a Driving Position in MEMO BUTTON for the driver’s seat position. Memory Store a driving position only when Two seat positions can be stored in the vehicle is parked. separate memories. You select a memorized position by pushing the 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON appropriate button or appropriate (II) position. You cannot add a remote transmitter (Driver 1 or new driving position in the Driver 2). memory unless the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. You can This setting can be linked or recall a memorized position with INDICATORS unlinked with the remote transmitter. the ignition switch in any position. MEMORY BUTTONS To customize the setting ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’, see page103 .2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable 3. Press and release the MEMO position (see page138 ). button on the driver’s door. You will hear a beep. Then, both indicators in the memory buttons will start to blink. Press and hold one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) within 5 seconds after you press the MEMO button. When the system completes to store a new driving position, you hear two beeps. The indicator in the stored memory button will come on.
142 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２５：３５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１４６
Driving Position Memory System
Doing any of the following after Selecting a Memorized Position The system will move the driver’s pressing the MEMO button will seat to the memorized position. The cancel the storing procedure. indicator in the selected memory button will flash during movement. Not pressing a memory button When the adjustment is complete, within 5 seconds. you will hear two beeps, and the Controls and Instruments indicator will stay on. Pressing the MEMO button again within 5 seconds. Notes for vehicles with M/T You cannot select a memorized Readjusting the seat position. position if the transmission is in reverse. Shift to another gear, Each memory button stores only one MEMORY BUTTONS then select. driving position. Storing a new position erases the previous setting To select a memorized position, do If the parking brake is not set, you stored in that button’s memory. If this: must press and hold the memory you want to add a new position while button until the adjustment is retaining the current one, use the 1. Make sure the parking brake is set complete. other memory button. (M/T) or the shift lever is in Park (A/T). All stored driving positions will be lost if your vehicle’s battery goes 2. Press the desired memory button dead or is disconnected. (1 or 2) until you hear a beep.
CONTINUED
143 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２５：４０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１４７
Driving Position Memory System
To stop the system’s automatic If desired, you can use the adjustment, do any of these actions: adjustment switches to change the seat position after it is in its Press any button on the driver’s memorized position. If you change door: MEMO, memory button 1 or the memorized position, the 2. indicator in the memory button will go out. To keep this seat position for Push any of the adjustment later use, you must store it in the switches for the seat. driver’s seat position memory.
Shift out of Park (A/T), or into reverse (M/T).
144 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２５：４４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１４８
Mirrors
The inside mirror can automatically OFF BUTTON INDICATOR darken to reduce glare. To turn on this feature, press the AUTO button on the bottom of the mirror. The indicator comes on as a reminder. When it is on, the mirror darkens Controls and Instruments when it senses the headlights of a vehicle behind you, then returns to normal visibility when the lights are gone. Press the OFF button to turn off this feature. AUTO BUTTON
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
145 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２５：５３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１４９
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. Push or pull the adjustment knob PowerMirrorHeaters right, left, up, or down to move the ADJUSTMENT KNOB mirror. HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
4. When you finish, turn the adjustment knob to the center (off) position. This turns off the adjustment knob to keep your settings.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON The outside mirrors are heated to (II) position. remove fog and frost. With the ignition switch in the ON (II) 2. Turn the adjustment knob to L position, turn on the heaters by (driver’s side) or R (passenger’s pressing the button. The indicator in side). the button comes on as a reminder. Press the button again to turn the heaters off.
146 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２６：００ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１５０
Power Windows
AUTO － To open the driver’s window, push the window switch Closing a power window on firmly down, then release it. To stop someone’s hands or fingers can the window from going all the way cause serious injury. down, pull back on the window switch briefly. Controls and Instruments Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before To close the driver’s window fully, closing them. pull back the window switch firmly, then release it. To stop the window MAIN SWITCH from going all the way up, push DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH If the MAIN switch is pushed down down on the window switch briefly. (OFF), the passenger windows Turn the ignition switch to the ON cannot be raised or lowered. Keep To open or close the driver’s window (II) position before operating any of the MAIN switch off when you have partially, push down or pull back on the window switches. To open a children in the vehicle so they do not the window switch lightly and hold it. window, push the switch down and injure themselves by operating the The window will stop when you hold it. To close the window, pull the windows unintentionally. release the switch. switchupandholdit.Releasethe switch to stop the window.
CONTINUED
147 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２６：０７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１５１
Power Windows
AUTO REVERSE － If the driver’s If your vehicle’s battery is The power window system has a key- window senses any obstacle while it disconnected or goes dead, or the off delay function. The windows will is closing automatically, it will driver’s window fuse is removed, the still operate for up to 10 minutes reverse direction, and then stop. To AUTO function will be disabled. The after you turn off the ignition switch. close the window, remove the power window system needs to be Opening either front door cancels obstacle, then use the window switch reset after reconnecting the battery the delay function. You must turn again. or installing the fuse. the ignition switch to the ON (II) position again before you can raise Auto reverse stops sensing when the 1. Start the engine. Push down and or lower the windows. window is almost closed. You should hold the driver’s window switch always check that all passengers and until the window is fully open. objects are away from the window before closing it. 2. Pull and hold the driver’s window switch to close the window completely, then hold the switch for about 2 seconds.
If the power windows do not operate properly after resetting, have your vehicle checked by your dealer.
148 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２６：２１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１５２
Power Windows
Opening the Windows with the UNLOCK BUTTON 3. Turnthekeyclockwiseagain,and Remote Transmitter hold it. All four windows start to You can open all of the windows open. To stop the windows, from the outside with the remote release the key. transmitter. Open 4. To open the windows further, turn Controls and Instruments 1. Press the UNLOCK button once andholdthekeyagain(within to unlock the driver’s door Close 10 seconds). (depending on the ‘‘DOOR LOCK MODE’’ setting). To close: 1. Insert the key in the driver’s door 2. Press the UNLOCK button a lock. second time, and hold it. The passenger’s doors unlock, and all Opening/Closing the Windows with 2. Turn the key counterclockwise, four windows start to open. To the Key then release it. stop the windows, release the You can open and close the windows button. with the key in the driver’s door lock. 3. Turn the key counterclockwise again, and hold it. All four 3. To open the windows further, To open: windowsstarttoclose.Tostopthe press the button again (within 10 1. Insert the key in the driver’s door windows, release the key. seconds). lock. 4. To close the windows further, turn You cannot close the windows with 2. Turn the key clockwise, then andholdthekeyagain(within the remote transmitter. release it. 10 seconds).
149 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２６：２９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１５３
Moonroof
To tilt up the back of the moonroof, The moonroof has a key-off delay press and hold the center button function. You can still open and close ( ). To close the moonroof, the moonroof for up to 10 minutes press and hold the upper part of the after you turn off the ignition switch. switch ( ). To open the The key-off delay function cancels as moonroof, press and hold the lower soon as you open either front door. part of the switch ( ). Release Youmustthenturntheignition the switch when the moonroof gets switch to the ON (II) position to to the desired position. Make sure operate the moonroof. everyone’s hands are away from the moonroof before opening or closing it. If you try to open the moonroof in The moonroof has two positions: it below-f reezing temperatures, or when can be tilted up in the back for it is covered with snow or ice, you can ventilation, or it can be slid back into Opening or closing the damage the moonroof panel or motor. the roof. Use the switch under the moonroof on someone’s hands left dashboard vent to operate the or fingers can cause serious moonroof. The ignition switch must injury. be in the ON (II) position. Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.
150 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２６：３６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１５４
Parking Brake
If you drive without releasing the parking brake, a beeper will sound, and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE’’ message in the multi-information display (see page 78 ). Controls and Instruments
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied can damage the rear brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if the vehicle is put into gear with the To apply the parking brake, pull the parking brake on. lever up fully. To release it, pull up slightly, push the button, and lower the lever. The parking brake indicator on the instrument panel should go out when the parking brake is fully released (see page63 ).
151 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２６：４２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１５５
Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror
To use the sun visor, pull it down. To use a vanity mirror on the back of You can also use the sun visor at the the sun visor, pull up the cover. side window. Remove the support rod from the clip and swing the sun The lights come on when you pull up visor toward the side window. the cover.
152 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２６：５２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１５６
Interior Lights
Ceiling Light In the Door Activated position, the light comes on when you: DOOR ACTIVATED Front Open either door. Remove the key from the ignition switch. ntuet n Controls and Instruments ON Unlock the doors with the key or remote transmitter. If you do not open a door, the light fades out in about 10 seconds. OFF After all doors are closed tightly, the light dims slightly, then fades out in Rear DOOR ACTIVATED about 30 seconds. The rear ceiling light has a three- The front ceiling lights have a two- To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT position switch. In the OFF position, position switch. In the Door DIMMING TIME,’’ see page105 . the light does not come on. In the Activated position, the lights come Door Activated position, the ceiling on when you open any door. In the Turn on the front ceiling lights by lightcomesonwhenyouopenany OFF position, the lights do not come pushing the lens. Push the lens again door. After all doors are closed on. to turn if off. You can use these tightly, the light fades out in about lights at all times. 30 seconds. In the ON position, the ceiling light stays on continuously.
CONTINUED
153 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２６：５７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１５７
Interior Lights
Courtesy Light Individual Interior Lights The courtesy lights in the front COURTESY LIGHT doors and around the ignition switch come on when you open any door. After you close the door, the ignition switch light stays on for several seconds.
The courtesy light between the spotlights comes on when you turn the parking lights on. To adjust its brightness, turn the Select/Reset knob on the instrument panel.
154
155
CONTINUED
EEAEHOLDERS BEVERAGE TRUNK
CESR OE SOCKET POWER ACCESSORY EEAEHOLDERS BEVERAGE
TLT POCKET/ UTILITY ETRARMREST/ CENTER LV BOX GLOVE
Instruments and Controls
ETRPOCKET CENTER
CESR OE SOCKET POWER ACCESSORY
RN ORPCE/EEAEHOLDER POCKET/BEVERAGE DOOR FRONT COMPARTMENT/ CONSOLE
neirCneineItems Convenience Interior ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２７：０２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１５８ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２７：１０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１５９
Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders Accessory Power Sockets Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. A spilled liquid Front Rear that is very hot can scald you or your passengers. Liquid can also spill from the door pocket beverage holders when you close the doors. Useonlyresealablecontainersinthe door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.
To use the accessory power socket, None of the sockets will power an pull up the cover. The ignition switch automotive type cigarette lighter must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or element. When more than one ON (II) position. socket is being used, the combined power rating of the accessories These sockets are intended to supply should be 120 watts or less power for 12 volt DC accessories (10 amps). that are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps).
156 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２７：１６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１６０
Interior Convenience Items
Console Compartment ntuet n Controls and Instruments
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT To open the console compartment, Youcanputsmallitemsinthetray pull up on the right lever and lift the located in the console compartment armrest. lid. To use the tray, pull up on the left lever and lift up the armrest. To close, lower the armrest, and push it down until it latches. Thetrayintheconsolecompartment has a coin holder.
157 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２７：２４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１６１
Interior Convenience Items
Sunglasses Holder Glove Box
An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger inacrash,evenifthe passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while driving.
GLOVE BOX To open the sunglasses holder, push Open the glove box by pulling the on the front edge. Make sure the handle to the left. Close it with a firm holder is closed while you are driving. push. Lock or unlock the glove box with the master key.
The glove box light comes on when the parking lights are on.
158 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２７：３０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１６２
Features
The climate control system in your Climate Control System...... 160 Removing CDs from the vehicle provides a comfortable Voice Control System...... 162 Changer...... 192 driving environment in all weather Dual Temperature Control...... 167 CD Changer Error Messages...... 193 conditions. Climate Control Sensors...... 169 Protecting your CDs...... 194 Playing the AM/FM Radio...... 170 General Information...... 194 The standard audio system has Voice Control System...... 172 Protecting CDs...... 194 many features. This section de- To Play the AM/FM Radio...... 172 Playing a Tape...... 195 scribes those features and how to To Select a Station...... 172 To Play a Tape...... 197 Features use them. Adjusting the Sound...... 175 To Stop Playing a Tape...... 197 AM/FM Radio Reception...... 177 Tape Search Functions...... 198 Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio Radio Frequencies...... 177 Caring the Tape and Player...... 199 system that requires a code number Radio Reception...... 177 Steering Wheel Controls...... 200 to enable it. Playing the XM Satellite Radio Theft Protection...... 201 Radio...... 179 Setting the Clock...... 202 The security system helps to dis- Satellite Digital Radio...... 179 Security System...... 203 courage vandalism and theft of your Operating the XM Radio...... 180 Cruise Control...... 204 vehicle. Satellite Radio Signals...... 182 HomeLink Universal Receiving Satellite Radio Transceiver...... 207 Service...... 183 HandsFreeLinkTM ...... 211 Auxiliary Input Jack...... 184 Playing Discs...... 185 Operating the CD Changer...... 187 Loading CDs in the CD Changer...... 187 To Play a CD...... 188 To Stop Playing a CD...... 192
159 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２７：３５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１６３
Climate Control
Without navigation system DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
FAN CONTROL BAR A/C BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
FAN SPEED INDICATOR PASSENGER’S SIDE DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE CONTROL BAR CONTROL BAR
AUTO BUTTON OFF BUTTON REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON DUAL BUTTON WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON
160 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２７：４０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１６４
Climate Control
With navigation system
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TEMPERATURE DISPLAY Features A/C ICONS
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE CONTROL BAR CONTROL BAR AUTO BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON WINDSHIELD OFF BUTTON DEFROST BUTTON DUAL BUTTON REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON A/C BUTTON
MODE ICONS FAN CONTROL ICONS
161 ０５／０９／２２ １４：５４：３８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１６５
Climate Control
Proper use of the climate control Voice Control System Automatic Operation system can make the interior dry On vehicles with navigation system The automatic climate control and comfortable, and keep the The climate control system for your system adjusts the fan speed and windows clear for best visibility. vehicle can also be operated using airflow levels to maintain the interior the voice control system. See temperature you select. For the climate control system to NavigationsectioninyourQuick provide heating and cooling, the Start Guide for an overview of this On vehicles without navigation system engine must be running. system and the Navigation System 1. Press the AUTO button. You will manual for complete details. see AUTO in the display. You can adjust the temperatures of 2. Set the desired temperature by thedriver’ssideandthepassenger’s pushing▲▼ or of the driver’s side independently (see page167 ). side temperature control bar. The selected temperature will show in the upper display.
162 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２８：０４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１６６
Climate Control
On vehicles with navigation system When you push the passenger’s side Semi-automatic Operation In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’s temperature control bar, the You can manually select various interior temperature is indicator in the DUAL button comes functions of the climate control independently regulated for the on and the driver’s side and system when it is in the AUTO mode. driver and passenger. If the driver’s passenger’s side temperature can be All other features remain side of the vehicle is getting too controlled independently (see page automatically controlled. much sun, the system will adjust to a 167 ). lower temperature. On vehicles without navigation system Features The system automatically selects the Making any manual selection causes 1. Press the AUTO button. The proper mix of conditioned and/or thewordAUTOinthedisplaytogo indicator in the button comes on. heated air that will, as quickly as out. 2. Set the desired temperature by possible, raise or lower the interior pushing▲▼ or of the driver’s temperature to your preference. On vehicles with navigation system side temperature control bar. The Press the A/C button to view the selected temperature will show in When you set the temperature to its A/C manual control display. the upper display. lowest limit ( ) or its highest Making any manual selection causes limit ( ), the system runs at the indicator in the AUTO button to full cooling or heating only. It does turn off. not regulate the interior temperature.
In cold weather, the fan will not come on automatically until the heater starts to develop warm air.
CONTINUED
163 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２８：１５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１６７
Climate Control
Fan Control Temperature Control Air Conditioning (A/C) Button/ On vehicles without navigation system To adjust the desired temperature, Icons Select the fan speed by pressing the push▲ or▼ of the On vehicles without navigation system fan control bar (▲ or▼ ). temperature control bar. PresstheA/Cbuttontoturntheair The fan speed is represented by conditioningonandoff.Youwillsee vertical bars in the display. Dual Button A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display. Press the DUAL button to select On vehicles with navigation system dual temperature control mode (see On vehicles with navigation system Press the A/C button to view the page167 ). The indicator in the Press the A/C button to view the A/C manual control display. Touch DUAL button comes on. A/C manual control display. the fan control icons to the desired Touching ON or OFF icon in the speed. When you press the DUAL button display turns the air conditioning on again (indicator turns off), both and off. sides adjust to the driver’s side temperature. When you turn the A/C off, the system cannot regulate the inside temperature if you set the temperature control below the outside temperature.
164 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２８：２４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１６８
Climate Control
Recirculation Button Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh Windshield Defroster Button When the indicator in the button is air mode under almost all conditions. This button turns the windshield on, air from the vehicle’s interior is Keeping the system in recirculation defrost on and off. sent throughout the system again. mode, particularly with the A/C off, When the indicator is off, air is can cause the windows to fog up. When you push this button, air flows brought in from the outside of the from the defroster vents at the base vehicle (fresh air mode). Switch to recirculation mode when of the windshield, and the system driving through dusty or smoky automatically switches to fresh air Features The outside air intakes for the conditions, then return to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. When climate control system are at the mode. the indicator in the button is on, the base of the windshield. Keep this passenger’s temperature cannot be area clear of leaves and other debris. set separately from the driver’s.
Rear Window Defogger Button This button turns the rear window defogger off and on (see page123 ).
CONTINUED
165 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２８：３７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１６９
Climate Control
Mode ControlAir flows from the center To Turn Everything Off Use the mode control buttons or and corner vents in the dashboard. If you press the OFF button, the icons to select the vents the air flows climate control system shuts off from. Some air flows from the Airflow is divided between completely. dashboard corner vents in all modes. the vents in the dashboard and the Keep the system off for short floor vents. periods only. On vehicles with navigation system To keep stale air and mustiness Press the A/C button to view the Air flows from the floor from collecting, you should have A/C manual control display, then vents. the fan running at all times. touch any of the mode icons on the display. Airflow is divided between On vehicles with navigation system the floor vents and the defroster When the climate control system is vents at the base of the windshield. turned off, the temperature in the upper display will also turn off.
166 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２８：４４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１７０
Dual Temperature Control
Your vehicle has two temperature Without navigation system control bars, one for the driver, and one for the passenger. DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TEMPERATURE DISPLAY Thedriver’ssideandthepassenger’s side can be controlled independently by adjusting these bars when the
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE Features green indicator in the DUAL button TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE is lit. CONTROL BAR CONTROL BAR
To set the driver’s side temperature to a different value than the DUAL BUTTON passenger’s, press the DUAL button, With navigation system then press the temperature control bars (▲▼ or side) on the driver’s side. To set the passenger’s side to a DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE different value than the driver’s, TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE press the temperature control bars CONTROL BAR CONTROL BAR (▲▼ or side) on the passenger’s side. You can adjust the passenger’s side without pressing the DUAL DUAL BUTTON button first.
CONTINUED
167 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２８：５０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１７１
Dual Temperature Control
Temperature Control Bars Push AUTO or . The selected temperatures appear in the upper display. For vehicles with navigation DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE system when the indicator in the DUALbuttonisoff,youcanadjust both sides to the same temperature by adjusting the driver’s side temperature control bar (▲▼ or side).
When you set the temperature to its lower or upper limit, it is displayed as or .
168 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２８：５５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１７２
Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature Sensor
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Features
Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the top of the dashboard, and a temperature sensor is next to the steering column. Do not cover the sensors or spill any liquid on them.
169 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２９：００ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１７３
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Without navigation system
AM/FM BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR
A. SEL BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON SEEK BAR
PWR/VOL KNOB PRESET BUTTONS TUNE/SOUND KNOB
U.S. model is shown.
170 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２９：０６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１７４
Playing the AM/FM Radio
With navigation system UPPER DISPLAY Features
PRESET ICONS A.SEL ICON SOUND ICON SCAN ICON
PWR/VOL KNOB TUNE/SOUND KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BAR AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON
U.S. model is shown. SCAN BUTTON AM/FM BUTTON
171 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２９：１５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１７５
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Voice Control System To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station On vehicles with navigation system The ignition switch must be in the You can use any of five methods to The audio system for your vehicle ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) find radio stations on the selected can also be operated using the voice position. Turn the system on by band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO control system. See the Navi section pushingthePWR/VOLknoborthe SELECT, and the preset buttons or in your Quick Start Guide for an AM/FM button. Adjust the volume icons. overview of this system, and the by turning the same knob. navigation system manual for TUNE － Use the TUNE/SOUND complete details. On vehicles with navigation system knob to tune the radio to a desired Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAY frequency. Turn the knob right to button will also turn on the system. tune to a higher frequency, and turn theknoblefttotunetoalower The band and frequency that the frequency. radio was last tuned to is displayed. To change bands, press the FM/AM SEEK － The SEEK function button. On the FM band, ST will be searches up and down from the displayed if the station is broadcast- current frequency to find a station ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on with a strong signal. To activate it, AM is not available. press the or side of the SEEK bar, then release it. On U.S. models XM satellite radio information is available on page183 .
172 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２９：２４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１７６
Playing the AM/FM Radio
On vehicles with navigation system Preset － Each preset button or icon 3. Pick the preset number (1－ 6) To use the SCAN, preset and A.SEL can store one frequency on AM, and you want for that station. Press function, press the AUDIO DISPLAY two frequencies on FM. the button or icon and hold it until button to view these icons. you hear a beep. 1. Select the desired band, AM or SCAN － The SCAN function FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a samples all stations with strong two frequencies with each preset total of six stations on AM and signals on the selected band. To button or icon. twelve stations on FM. Features activate it, press the SCAN button, or touch the SCAN icon (models with 2. UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN The preset frequencies will be lost if navigation system), then release it. function to tune the radio to a your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is You will see SCAN in the display. desired station. disconnected, or the radio fuse is The system will scan for a station removed. with a strong signal. When it finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 5 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will then scan for the next strong station andplayitfor5seconds.Whenit plays a station you want to listen to, press the SCAN button or touch the SCAN icon again.
CONTINUED
173 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２９：２８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１７７
Playing the AM/FM Radio
AUTO SELECT － If you are If you do not like the stations Auto traveling far from home and can no Select has stored, you can store longer receive your preset stations, other frequencies on the preset you can use the auto select feature to buttons or icons. Use the TUNE, find stations in the local area. SEEK, or SCAN function to find stations, then store them in the Press the A. SEL button or touch the preset buttons or icons as described A. SEL icon. A. SEL will appear in previously. the display, and the system will go into scan mode for several seconds. To turn off Auto Select, press the It stores the frequencies of six AM, A.SEL button or touch the A.SEL and twelve FM stations in the preset icon. This restores the presets you buttons (1－ 6) or icons. You will originally set. see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing a preset button or icon if Auto Select cannot find a strong station for every preset button or icon.
174 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２９：３８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１７８
Adjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Sound On vehicles without navigation system On vehicles with navigation system Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are You select which of these you want each adjustable. to adjust by pressing the TUNE/ SOUND knob. The mode changes Balance/Fader － These two from BASS to TREBLE to FADER to modes adjust the strength of the BALANCE,andthenbacktothe sound coming from each speaker. selected audio mode, each time you BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength, press the knob. Turn the knob to Features while FAD adjusts the front-to-back adjust the setting to your liking. strength. When the level reaches the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the display. Treble/Bass － Use the TRE/BAS modes to adjust the tone to your The system will automatically return liking. the display to the selected audio mode about 5 seconds after you stop Ifyouwanttoadjustthesoundwhile adjusting a mode. the radio or CD is playing, push the AUDIO DISPLAY button and then push the TUNE/SOUND knob or touch the SOUND icon in the display. The current setting is shown on the display.
CONTINUED
175 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２９：４３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１７９
Adjusting the Sound
To adjust the TREBLE and BASS, touch＋－ or on each side of the TREBLE or BASS adjustment bar. The adjustment bar shows you the current setting.
The Left/Right BALANCE adjusts the side-to-side strength, while Front/Rear FADER adjust the front- to-back strength. To adjust the Left/ Right BALANCE, touch the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon. To adjust the Front/Rear ADJUSTMENT BARS FADER, touch the ‘‘FR’’ or ‘‘RR’’ icon.
You select which of these you want The system will automatically return to adjust by pressing the TUNE/ the display to the selected audio SOUND knob. The mode changes mode about 5 seconds after you stop from BASS to TREBLE to FADER to adjusting a mode. BALANCE,andthenbacktothe selected audio mode, each time you press the button. You can also select themodebytouchingthe adjustment bar on the display directly.
176 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２９：５３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１８０
AM/FM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the station’s cies: transmitter, nearby large objects, and atmospheric conditions. AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz A radio station’s signal gets weaker Features as you get farther away from its Radio stations on the AM band are transmitter. If you are listening to an assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz AM station, you will notice the sound apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the volume becoming weaker, and the FM band are assigned frequencies at stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of see the stereo indicator flickering off a station that is broadcasting on a Stations must use these exact and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of frequencies. It is fairly common for Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can stations to round-off the frequency in go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio’s reception. their advertising, so your radio could completely as you get out of range of You may temporarily hear both display a frequency of 100.9 even the station’s signal. stations,orhearonlythestationyou though the announcer may identify are close to. the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
CONTINUED
177 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：２９：５９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１８１
AM/FM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions. a main cause of poor radio reception in city driving. Electrical interference from passing vehicles and stationary sources can cause temporary reception problems.
178 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３０：０８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１８２
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)
Satellite Digital Radio without navigation system with navigation system U.S. Models only Your vehicle is capable of receiving SCAN BUTTON PWR/VOL PRESET ICONS XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the KNOB United States, except Hawaii and CATEGORY/CHANNEL MODE UPPER DISPLAY Alaska. MODE INDICATOR ICON XM is a registered trade mark of
XM BUTTON Features XM Satellite Radio, Inc. DISP/MODE BUTTON
XM Satellite Radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offers many channels in several categories. Along with a large SOUND selection of different types of music, ICON XM Satellite Radio also allows you to SCAN view channel and category selections ICON in the audio display.
SCAN TUNE/ PWR/VOL PRESET TUNE/ BUTTON SOUND KNOB BUTTONS SOUND KNOB KNOB AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON SEEK/SKIP SEEK/SKIP CATEGORY BAR CATEGORY BAR XM BUTTON
CONTINUED
179 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３０：１７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１８３
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)
Operating the XM Radio MODE－－To switch between the TUNE Turn the TUNE knob to To listen to the XM satellite Radio, category mode and channel mode, change channel selections. Turn the turn the ignition switch to the press and hold the DISP/MODE knob right for higher numbered ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. button until the mode changes. On channels and left for lower Push the PWR/VOL knob to turn on models with navigation system, numbered channels. In the category the audio system, and press the XM touch the MODE icon on the display. mode, you can only select channels button. Adjust the volume turning In channel mode, you can select all within that category. the PWR/VOL knob. The last of the available channels. In category channel you listened to will show in mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, the display. etc., you can select all of the channels within that category. On vehicles with navigation system To operate the XM Radio, Press the On vehicles without navigation system AUDIO DISPLAY button to view the DISP － Each time you press and XM Radio control display. release the DISP/MODE button, the display changes in the following sequence: Channel name, category, artist name, and music title.
180 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３０：２６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１８４
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) － Preset － Youcanstoreupto12 3. Pick a preset number (icon) you Press either side of the CATEGORY preset channels using each side of want for that channel. Press and bar ( or ) to select another the preset bar or preset icons on the hold the bar (icon) until you hear a category. screen. Each side of the bar stores beep. one channel from the XM1 band and SCAN － The scan function gives one channel from the XM2 band. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the you a sampling of all channels while first six channels. in the channel mode. In the category To store a channel: Features mode, only the channels within that 5. Press the XM button again or category are scanned. To activate 1. Press the XM button. Either XM1 touch the other XM icon (XM1 or scan, press the SCAN button or or XM2 will show in the display. XM2) on the audio display. Store touch the SCAN icon on the screen. the next six channels using steps 2 The system plays each channel in 2. Usethetune,seek,orscan and 3. numerical order for a few seconds, function to tune to a desired then selects the next channel. When channel. Once a channel is stored, press and you hear a channel you want to listen release the proper side of the preset to, press the button or touch the icon In category mode, only channels bar (icon) to tune to it. again. within that category can be selected. In channel mode, all channels can be selected.
CONTINUED
181 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３０：３１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１８５
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)
Satellite Radio Signals Satellite radio receives signals from Signal may be two satellites to produce clear, high- blocked by mountains or quality digital reception. It offers large obstacles many channels in several categories. to the south. Along with a large selection of different types of music, satellite radio also allows you to view channel and category selections in the audio display.
TheXMsatellitesareinorbitover the equator; therefore, objects south SATELLITE of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. To help compensate for this, ground-based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas. Satellite signals aremorelikelytobeblockedbytall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.
GROUND REPEATER
182 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３０：４３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１８６
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)
Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: To get your XM Satellite radio ID may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly number: Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for Turn the TUNE knob until ‘‘0’’ these conditions: compliance could void the user’s appears in the display. Your I.D. will authority to operate the equipment. appear in the display. Drivingonaneast/westroadwith a mountain on the south side of Receiving Satellite Radio Service After you have registered with XM the road. If your XM Radio service has expired Radio, keep your audio system in the Features Driving on the north side of a or you purchased your vehicle from SAT Radio mode while you await large commercial truck on an a previous owner, you can listen to a activation. This should take about 30 east/west road. sampling of the broadcasts available minutes. Driving in tunnels. on XM Satellite Radio. With the Driving on a road beside a vertical ignition switch in the ACCESSORY While awaiting activation, make sure wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south (I) or ON (II) position, push the your vehicle remains in an open area of you. PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio with good reception. Once your Driving on the lower level of a system and press the CD/AUX XM audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’ multi-tiered road. button. A variety of music types and or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display Driving on a single lane road styles will play. and you will be able to listen to XM alongside dense trees taller than Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will 50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. If you decide to purchase XM continue to send an activation signal satellite radio service, contact XM to your vehicle for at least 12 hours Theremaybeothergeographic Radio atwww.xmradio.com , or at from activation request. If the situations that could affect satellite 1-800-852-9696. You will need to give service has not been activated after radio reception. them your radio I.D. number and 36 hours, contact XM Radio. your credit card number. CONTINUED
183 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３０：４８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１８７
Auxiliary Input Jack
Auxiliary Input Jack To use the jack, turn down the volume of the portable unit, and pivot the cover up, then plug in a mini-jack cable between the portable unit and the jack. You will see AUX in the display and the system automatically switches to AUX mode. To adjust the volume, turn the PWR/ VOL knob.
To take the system out of AUX mode, press the AM/FM, or CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM (U.S. models only) button. To return to AUX mode Your audio system will accept while the jack is connected, press the auxiliary inputs from a portable CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM button. cassette player, MP3 player, etc.
184 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３０：５２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１８８
Playing Discs
Without navigation system TRACK NUMBER
DISC NUMBER REPEAT BUTTON Features AM/FM BUTTON
CD BUTTON RANDOM BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
CD LOAD INDICATOR
LOAD BUTTON CD SLOT EJECT BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS U.S. model is shown. 185 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３０：５８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１８９
Playing Discs
With navigation system UPPER DISPLAY
DISC ICON
TRACK ICON TRACK REPEAT ICON
DISC SCAN ICON CH DISC ICONS TRACK SCAN ICON SOUND ICON
CD LOAD INDICATOR TRACK RANDOM ICON DISC REPEAT ICON LOAD BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR CH DISC BAR SCAN BUTTON AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON CD/AUX BUTTON CD SLOT U.S. model is shown. 186
187
CONTINUED
o h ict eue yC player. CD by used be to disc the for
recordingmustbeclosedinorder
eodn DRo DR,the CD-RW, or CD-R a recording steC sloaded. is CD the as
ic aee o ui s.When use. audio for labeled discs odidctrtrsrdadblinks and red turns indicator load
DR ic,ueol ihquality high only use discs, CD-RW ‘UY’i h ipa steCD the as display the in ‘‘BUSY’’
o etrslswe sn DRor CD-R using when results best For eto h a.Yuwl see will You way. the of rest
afa;tediewl uli nthe in it pull will drive the halfway;
ojmi h unit. the in jam to loaded. oe n neti nyabout only it Insert on. comes
h ae a ulu n as h CD the cause and up curl can label The ytmbgn lyn h atCD last the playing begins system hntegenC odindicator load CD green the when
ontueCswt deielabels. adhesive with CDs use not Do 3. o odn l i oiin,the positions, six all loading not netteds noteC slot CD the into disc the Insert
i oiin r odd fyuare you If loaded. are positions six
5. eetses1truh3utlall until 3 through 1 steps Repeat ih trsblinking. starts light
oiini ihihe n h red the and highlighted is position
2. position. aaeteadounit. audio the damage h icnme o nempty an for number disc The
nteACSOY()o N(II) ON or (I) ACCESSORY the in ‘OD’apas o could You appears. ‘‘LOAD’’
hne,teinto wthms be must switch ignition the changer, onttyt netads until disc a insert to try not Do ees h ODbutton. LOAD the release
ola D roeaeteCD the operate or CDs load To ola nyoeC,pesand press CD, one only load To
Features
aecnrl sdfrteradio. the for used controls same nteslot. the in
prt hsC hne ihthe with changer CD this operate ipa gi,isr h etCD next the insert again, display h display. the
otnosetranet You entertainment. continuous re n ‘OD’apasi the in appears ‘‘LOAD’’ and green erabe n e ‘OD’in ‘‘LOAD’’ see and beep a hear
4. 1. rvdn eea or of hours several providing hnteC odidctrturns indicator load CD the When rs h ODbto ni you until button LOAD the Press
Dcagrta od pt i CDs, six to up holds that changer CD operation:
oradosse a nin-dash an has system audio Your (8-cm)discsinthissystem. ola utpedssi one in discs multiple load To
odn D nteChanger the in CDs Loading Changer CD the Operating o antla n ly3-inch play and load cannot You
lyn Discs Playing ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３１：０９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１９０ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３１：１５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１９１
Playing Discs
If you are not loading CDs into all six To Play a CD To select a different disc, press an positions, press the LOAD button Select the CD changer by pressing appropriate preset button (1－ 6) or again after the last CD has loaded. the CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in use the Preset 5 (DISC－ ) to select The system will begin playing the the display. The system will begin the previous disc or Preset 6 (DISC last CD loaded. playing the last selected CD in the ＋) to select the next disc in CD changer. You will see the disc sequence. On vehicles with If you stop loading discs before all and track numbers displayed. navigation system, touch the six positions are filled, the system appropriate disc icon or press the ▲ will wait for 15 seconds, stop the load When that CD ends, the next CD in or▼ side of the CH/DISC bar. If operation, and begin playing the last the CD changer is loaded and played. youselectanemptypositioninthe disc loaded. After the last CD finishes, the CD changer, the system will try to system returns to the first CD. load the CD in the next available slot. You can also load a CD into an empty position while a CD is playing. Select the empty position (the disc number indicator is not highlighted) and press the appropriate preset bar or touch a disc icon. The current CD stops playing and starts the loading sequence. The CD just loaded will play.
188 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３１：２４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１９２
Playing Discs
SEEK/SKIP － Each time you On vehicles without navigation system RANDOM by pressing the RDM press and release side of the REPEAT － To activate the repeat button again. SEEK/SKIP bar, the system skips feature, press and release the RPT forward to the beginning of the next button. You will see RPT in the SCAN － The SCAN function track. Press and release side display as a reminder. The system samples all the tracks on the of the bar to skip backward to the continuously replays the current selected disc in the order they are beginning of the current track. Press track. Press the RPT button again to recorded on the CD. To activate it, it again to skip to the beginning of turn it off. Pressing either of the press and release the SCAN button. Features the previous track. SKIP buttons also turns off the You will see SCAN in the display as a repeat feature. reminder. The system will then play To move rapidly within a track, press the first track for approximately 10 and hold the or side of the DISC REPEAT － Press and hold seconds. If you do nothing, the SEEK/SKIP bar. the RPT button to continuously system will then play the following replay the current CD. You will see tracks for 10 seconds each. When it D-RPT in the display as a reminder. plays a track that you want to Press the button again to turn it off. continue listening to, press the SCAN button again. RANDOM － The RANDOM function plays the tracks within a CD in random order, rather than in the order they are recorded on the CD. To activate it, press the RDM button. You will see RDM in the display as a reminder. The system will then select and play tracks randomly. This continues until you deactivate CONTINUED
189 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３１：２９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１９３
Playing Discs
DISC SCAN－ This feature, when On vehicles with navigation system TRACK SCAN － This function activated, samples each first track of To use the functions described as samples all the tracks on the all the discs in the CD changer in the follows, press the AUDIO DISPLAY selected disc in the order they are order they are stored. To activate button to view the CD control icons recorded on the CD. To activate it, the DISC SCAN feature, press and in the display. touch the TRACK SCAN icon or hold the SCAN button. You will see press and release the SCAN button. D-SCAN in the display as a reminder. You will see SCAN on the left side of The system will then play the first TRACKicononthedisplayasa track of the first CD for reminder. Also, it appears on the approximately 10 seconds. If you do upper display. The system will then nothing, the system will then play play the first track for approximately the next CD’s first track. When it 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the plays a disc that you want to system will then play the following continue listening to, press the tracks for 10 seconds each. When it SCAN button again. plays a track that you want to continue listening to, touch the TRACK SCAN icon or press the SCAN button again.
190 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３１：３５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１９４
Playing Discs
DISC SCAN－－This function TRACK REPEAT Touch the TRACK RANDOM － The TRACK samples each first track of all the TRACK REPEAT icon to RANDOM function plays the tracks discs in the CD changer in the order continuously replay a track. You will within a CD in random order, rather they are stored. To activate it, touch see REPEAT on the left side of the than in the order they are recorded the DISC SCAN icon or press and TRACKicononthedisplayasa on the CD. To activate it, press the hold the SCAN button. You will see reminder. Also, RPT appears on the TRACK RANDOM icon. You will see SCANontheleftsideoftheDISC upper display. Press the icon again to RANDOM on the left side of the icon on the display as a reminder. turn it off. TRACKicononthedisplayasa Features Also, D-SCAN appears on the upper reminder. The system will then display. The system will then play DISC REPEAT － Touch the DISC select and play tracks randomly. the first track of the first CD for REPEAT icon to continuously replay This continues until you deactivate approximately 10 seconds. If you do the current CD. You will see TRACK RANDOM by touching the nothing, the system will then play REPEATontheleftsideoftheDISC TRACK RANDOM icon again. the next CD’s first track. When it icon. Also, D-RPT appears on the plays a disc that you want to upper display. Press the icon again to continue listening to, touch the DISC turn it off. SCAN icon or press the SCAN button again.
CONTINUED
191 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３１：４３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１９５
Playing Discs
To Stop Playing a CD Removing CDs from the Changer After that disc is ejected, pressing If you turn off the system while a CD To remove the disc that is currently the eject button again will eject the is playing, either by pushing the playing, press and release the eject next disc in numerical order. By PWR/VOL knob or by turning off ( ) button. You will see EJECT doing this six times, you can remove the ignition, the CD will stay in the in the display. When you remove the all the CDs from the changer. drive. When you turn the system disc from the slot, the system begins back on, it will begin at the same disc the load sequence so you can load If you press the eject button while and track. another disc in that position. If you listening to the radio, or with the do not load another CD within 15 audio system turned off, the disc To take the system out of CD mode, seconds, the system selects the that was last selected is ejected. press the AM/FM or CD/AUX, or previous mode [AM, FM1, FM2, or CD/AUX/XM button to switch to XM Radio (U.S. models)]. In any mode, if you press the eject the radio or satellite radio (U.S. button and hold it until you hear a models only), or optional tape player If you do not remove the CD from beep, the system will eject all of the (if the tape is in it) while a CD is the slot, the system will reload the discs in the changer. playing. When you return to CD CD after 15 seconds and put the CD mode by pressing the CD/AUX or changer in pause mode. To begin You can also eject discs when the CD/AUX/XM button, play will playing the CD, press the CD button. ignition switch is off by pressing the continue at the same point that it left eject button. The disc that was last off. To remove a different CD from the selected is ejected first. You can changer,firstselectitwiththe eject up to 5 discs, one at a time. appropriate preset button, or the appropriate icon or CH/DISC bar. When that CD begins playing, press the eject button.
192 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３１：５１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１９６
CD Player Error Messages
If you see an error message in the display while playing a CD, find the Error Message Cause Solution cause in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take Press the eject button and pull out the disc. the vehicle to your dealer. (without navigation system) FOCUS Error Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player. (with navigation system) Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc. Features Check the disc for damage or deformation. (without navigation system) Mechanical Error If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error indication does not disappear after the disc is ejected, see your dealer. (with navigation system) Do not try to force the disc out of the player. High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to (without navigation system) normal.
193 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３２：０２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１９７
Protecting Your CDs
General Information Protecting CDs When using CD-R discs, use only When a CD is not being played, store high quality CDs labeled for audio it in its case to protect it from dust use. and other contamination. To prevent warpage, keep CDs out of direct When recording a CD-R, the sunlight and extreme heat. recording must be closed for it to be used by the system. To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the CD from the center Play only standard round CDs. to the outside edge. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the driveorcauseotherproblems. AnewCDmayberoughonthe inner and outer edges. The small Handle your CDs properly to plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a CD by its edges; never prevent damage and skipping. See can flake off and fall on the re- touch either surface. Do not place this page. cording surface of the CD, causing stabilizer rings or labels on the CD. skipping or other problems. Remove These, along with contamination these pieces by rubbing the inner from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip and outer edges with the side of a pens, can cause the CD to not play pencil or pen. properly or possibly jam in the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in the CD player or the magazine.
194 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３２：０７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１９８
Playing a Tape (Optional)
Without navigation system AM/FM BUTTON TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
NOISE REDUCTION INDICATOR Features
REPEAT BUTTON
CD/AUX BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
PWR/VOL KNOB PRESET BUTTONS
U.S. model is shown. 195 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３２：１２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０１９９
Playing a Tape (Optional)
With Navigation System UPPER DISPLAY TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
REW ICON FF ICON REPEAT ICON NR ICON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BAR CD/AUX BUTTON AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON AM/FM BUTTON U.S. model is shown. 196 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３２：２０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２００
Playing a Tape (Optional)
To Play a TapeDolby＊ noise reduction turns on To Stop Playing a Tape The ignition switch must be in the when you insert a tape. The If you turn the system off while a ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. indicator will light in the tape is playing, either with the PWR/ Make sure the open side of the tape display. If the tape was not recorded VOL knob or by turning off the is facing right, then insert the tape in Dolby, turn it off by pressing the ignition, the cassette will remain in most of the way into the slot. The Preset 4 (NR) or touching the NR the drive. When you turn the system system will pull the tape in the rest icon. Dolby remains off until you back on, the tape will begin playing of the way, and begin to play it. press the preset button or the icon where it left off. Features again. The tape direction indicator will light To switch to the radio or CD player to show you which side of the tape is ＊Dolby noise reduction while a tape is playing, press the playing. The▲ indicates the side manufactured under license from AM/FM, or CD/AUX button or CD/ youinsertedupwardisnowplaying. Dolby laboratories licensing AUX XM button. To change back to If you want to play the other side, Corporation. ‘‘Dolby’’ and the thetapeplayer,pushtheCD/AUX press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) or double-D symbol are trademarks button or CD/AUX XM button. press the AUDIO DISPLAY button of the Dolby Laboratories and touch either or icon. Licensing Corporation. When the player reaches the end of the tape, it will automatically reverse direction and play the other side.
CONTINUED
197 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３２：２９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２０１
Playing a Tape (Optional)
Tape Search Functions REPEAT － Press the RPT button NOTE: The skip and repeat SKIP － Each time you press and to continuously play a track or functions use silent periods on the releasethe sideoftheSEEK/ passage. You will see RPT displayed. tape to find the end of a song or SKIP bar, the player skips forward to The track will repeat until you press passage. These features may not the beginning of the next track. On the RPT button again. work if there is almost no gap vehicles without Navigation System, between selections, a high noise you will see FF in the display. Press On vehicles with navigation system level, or a silent period in the middle and release the side of the To use the functions described as of a selection. SKIPbartoskipbackwardtothe follow, press the AUDIO DISPLAY beginning of the current track. On button to view the control icons in If you see the error message vehicles without Navigation System, the display. ‘‘ ’’ on the display, press the you will see REW in the display. tape eject button to remove the tape FF/REW － To rewind the tape, from the unit. Make sure the tape is On vehicles without navigation system touch the REW icon. To fast forward not damaged. If the tape will not FF/REW － To rewind the tape, the tape, touch the FF icon. Press eject or the error message stays on push the Preset 1 (REW). You will either or icon to take the after the tape ejects, take your seeREWinthedisplay.Tofast system out of fast forward or rewind. vehicle to your dealer. forward the tape, push the Preset 2 (FF). You will see FF displayed. REPEAT － Touch the REPEAT Press the Preset 1, 2, or 3 (PLAY/ icon to continuously play a track. PRG) to take the system out of You will see REPEAT displayed. The rewind or fast forward. track will repeat until you touch the REPEAT icon again.
198 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３２：３８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２０２
Playing a Tape (Optional)
Caring for the Tape and Player If you do not clean the tape player If the tape is loose, tighten it by Thetapeplayerpicksupdirtand regularly, it may eventually become turning the hub with a pencil or your oxides from the tape. This impossible to remove the finger. If the label is peeling off, contamination builds up over time contamination with a normal remove it or it could cause the tape and causes the sound quality to cleaning kit. Your dealer has a to jam in the player. Never try to degrade. To prevent this, you should cleaning kit available. insert a warped or damaged tape in clean the player after every 30 hours the player. of use. Use 100-minute or shorter tapes. Features Tapes longer than that may break or Store tapes in their cases to protect jam the drive. them from dust and moisture. Never placetapeswheretheywillbe exposed to direct sunlight, high heat, or high humidity. If a tape is exposed to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a moderate temperature before inserting it into the player.
Never try to insert foreign objects into the tape player.
199 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３２：４５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２０３
Steering Wheel Controls
The VOL button adjusts the volume IfyouareplayingaCD,thesystem MODE BUTTON up (▲▼ ) or down ( ). Press the top skips to the beginning of the next or bottom of the button, hold it until track each time you press the top the desired volume is reached, then (＋ ) of the CH button. Press the release it. bottom (－ ) to return to the beginning of the current track. Press The MODE button changes the it twice to return to the previous mode. Pressing the button track. You will see the disc and track repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, numbers in the display. CD (if a CD is loaded), or a tape (if equipped). On models with satellite Ifyouareplayingatapeinthe VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON radio system, you can also select optional tape player, press the top XM1 and XM2. (＋ ) of the CH button to advance to Three controls for the audio system the next selection. Press the bottom are mounted in the steering wheel If you are listening to the radio, use (－ ) to go back to the previous hub. These let you control basic the CH button to change stations. selection. The system senses a silent functions without removing your Each time you press the top (＋ ) of period, then resumes playing. hand from the wheel. the button, the system goes to the next preset station on the band you are listening to. Press the bottom (－ ) to go back to the previous station.
200 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３２：５１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２０４
Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle’s audio system will If your vehicle’s battery is discon- If the code card is lost, a dealer can disable itself if it is disconnected nected or goes dead, the audio access your code with your radio’s from electrical power for any reason. system will disable itself. If this serial number. To access the serial To make it work again, you must happens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the number, turn the radio on. It must enter a specific code with the preset frequencydisplaythenexttimeyou display ‘‘CODE’’, then turn the radio buttons (icons on vehicles with turn on the system. Use the preset off. Push the preset 1, preset 6, and navigation system). Because there buttons (icons on vehicles with power buttons at the same time, then are hundreds of number navigation system) to enter the five- quickly release. Features combinations possible, making the digit code. The code is on the radio system work without knowing the code card included in your owner’s You will have to store your favorite exact code is nearly impossible. manual kit. When it is entered stations on each side of the preset correctly, the radio will start playing. buttons (1－ 6) after the system Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat begins working. Your original lists your audio system code number If you make a mistake entering the settings were lost when power was and serial number. It is best to store code, do not start over; complete the disconnected. this card in a safe place at home. In five-digit sequence, then enter the addition, you should write the audio correct code. You have 10 tries to system’s serial number in this owner’s enter the correct code. If you are manual. unsuccessful in 10 attempts, you must then leave the system on for 1 If you lose the card, you must obtain hour before trying again. the code number from a dealer. To do this, you will need the system’s serial number.
201 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３３：００ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２０５
Setting the Clock
On vehicles without navigation system DIGITAL CLOCK If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead, you will need to set the clock.
Press and hold the TUNE/SOUND knob. Change the hours by pressing the until you hear a beep. The displayed time begins to blink. Press on the H (Preset 4) until the numbers advance to the desired time. TUNE/SOUND Change the minutes by pressing the KNOB M (Preset 5) until the numbers H BUTTON R BUTTON advance to the desired time. When M BUTTON you are finished, press the TUNE/ SOUND knob again to set the time. You can quickly set the time to the For example: nearest hour. Pressing and holding 1:06 would RESET to 1:00. the TUNE/SOUND knob, then 1:52 would RESET to 2:00. pressing the R (Preset 6) sets the clockbacktotheprevioushour.If On vehicles with navigation system the displayed time is after the half Refer to the Navigation System hour, the clock sets the clock Owner’s Manual to set up the time. forward to the beginning of the next hour.
202 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３３：１１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２０６
Security System
The security system helps to protect SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR With the system set, you can still your vehicle and valuables from theft. open the trunk with the remote The horn sounds and a combination transmitter without triggering the of headlights, parking lights, side alarm. The alarm will sound if the marker lights and taillights flash if trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is someone attempts to break into your opened with the trunk release handle vehicleorremovetheradio.This or the emergency trunk opener. alarm continues for 2 minutes, then Features the system resets. To reset an The security system will not set if alarming system before the 2 the hood, trunk, or any door is not minutes have elapsed, unlock the fully closed. Before you leave the driver’s door with the key or use the vehicle, make sure the doors, trunk, remote transmitter. and hood are securely closed. To change the ‘‘SECURITY The security system automatically RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page NOTE: To see if the system is set sets 15 seconds (depending on the 114 . after you exit the vehicle, press the ‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ LOCK button on the remote setting) after you lock the doors, Once the security system is set, transmitter within 5 seconds. If the hood, and trunk. For the system to opening any door (without using the system is set, the horn will beep activate, you must lock the doors key or the remote transmitter), the once. from the outside with the key, lock hood, or the trunk will cause it to tab, door lock switch, or remote sound. It also sounds if the radio is Do not attempt to alter this system transmitter. The security system removed from the dashboard or the or add other devices to it. indicator in the instrument panel wiring is cut. starts blinking immediately to show you the system is setting itself.
203 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３３：２０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２０７
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain Using the Cruise Control asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h) without keeping your foot on the CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON CRUISE CONTROL MESSAGE accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open RES/ACCEL highways. It is not recommended for BUTTON city driving, winding roads, slippery CANCEL roads, heavy rain, or bad weather. BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash. DECEL/SET BUTTON U.S. model is shown Use the cruise control only 1. Push the Cruise Control Master 3. Press and release the DECEL/ when traveling on open Buttononthesteeringwheel.The SET button on the steering wheel. highways in good weather. CRUISE MAIN indicator in the The ‘‘CRUISE CONTROL’’ instrument panel comes on. message appears in the multi- information display to show the 2. Accelerate to the desired cruising system is now activated. speedabove25mph(40km/h).
204 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３３：２９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２０８
Cruise Control
Thecruisecontrolmaynotholdthe Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac- Tap the brake or clutch pedal set speed when you are going up and celerate to the desired cruising lightly with your foot. The down hills. If your speed increases speed and press the DECEL/SET ‘‘CRUISE CONTROL’’ message in going down a hill, use the brakes to button. the multi-information display goes slow down. This will cancel the out. When the vehicle slows to the cruise control. To resume the set To increase the speed in very desired speed, press the DECEL/ speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. small amounts, tap the RES/ SET button. The ‘‘CRUISE CONTROL’’ message ACCEL button. Each time you do Features in the multi-information display will this, your vehicle will speed up Even with the cruise control turned come back on. about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). on, you can still use the accelerator pedal to speed up for passing. After Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising completing the pass, take your foot You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways: off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle speed in any of these ways: will return to the set cruising speed. Press and hold the DECEL/SET Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. Release the button when Resting your foot on the brake or button. When you reach the you reach the desired speed. clutch pedal causes the cruise desired cruising speed, release the control to cancel. button. To slow down in very small amounts, tap the DECEL/SET button repeatedly. Each time you do this, your vehicle will slow down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
205 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３３：３５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２０９
Cruise Control
Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed Pressing the Cruise Control Master You can cancel cruise control in any When you push the CANCEL button, Button turns the system off and of these ways: or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the erases the previous cruising speed. system remembers the previously Tap the brake or clutch pedal. set cruising speed. To return to that speed, accelerate to above 25 mph Push the CANCEL button on the (40 km/h) then press and release steering wheel. the RES/ACCEL button. The ‘‘CRUISE CONTROL’’ message in Pushthecruisecontrolmaster the multi-information display comes button. on, and the vehicle accelerates to the same cruising speed as before.
206 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３３：４８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２１０
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
The HomeLink universal reverse if an obstacle is detected Training HomeLink transceiver built into your vehicle during closing, increasing the risk of Before you begin － If you just canbeprogrammedtooperateupto injury. received your vehicle and have not three remotely controlled devices trained any of the buttons in around your home, such as garage Important Safety Precautions HomeLink before, you should erase doors, lighting, or home security Always refer to the opening any previously learned codes before systems. instructions and safety information training the first button. that came with your garage door Features General Information opener or other equipment you Todothis,pressandholdthetwo If you are training HomeLink to intend to operate with HomeLink. If outside buttons on the HomeLink operate a garage door or gate, you you do not have this information, transceiver for about 20 seconds, should unplug the motor for that contact the manufacturer of the until the red indicator flashes. device during training. Repeatedly equipment. Release the buttons, then proceed to pressing the remote control button step 1. could burn out the motor. For quick and accurate training, If you are training the second or make sure the remote control third buttons, go directly to step 1. HomeLink stores the code in a transmitter for the device (garage permanent memory. There should door, automatic gate, security 1. Unplug the garage door opener be no need to retrain HomeLink if system, etc.) has a fresh battery. motor from the electrical outlet. your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is disconnected. If your garage door 2. Holdtheendofthegaragedoor opener was manufactured before opener remote 2 to 5 inches from April 1982, you may not be able to HomeLink. Make sure you are not program HomeLink to operate it. blocking your view of the red They do not have the safety feature indicator in HomeLink. that causes the motor to stop and CONTINUED
207 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３４：００ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２１１
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
If the red indicator in HomeLink second. continues to flash slowly (does If the button works, not flash rapidly), your remote programming is complete. transmitter may stop If the button does not work go transmitting after a short time. to step 6. Go to step 4. 6. PushandholdtheHomeLink 4. Pressandholdtheremote button for a few seconds, then transmitter button and one of the watch the red indicator on HomeLink buttons at the same HomeLink. time. While continuing to hold the If the indicator stays on or HomeLink button, press and flashes slowly, repeat steps 2 release the remote transmitter thru 5. 3. Pressandholdtheremote button every 2 seconds. If the indicator flashes rapidly transmitter button and one of the If the red indicator in HomeLink for 2 seconds then stays on, you HomeLink buttons at the same begins to flash slowly at first, have a rolling code transmitter: time. then rapidly, release both go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling If the red indicator in HomeLink buttons,andgotostep5. Code System’’ (see page209 ). begins to flash slowly at first, If the red indicator in HomeLink then rapidly, release both continues to flash slowly (does 7. Repeat these steps to train the buttons,andgotostep5. not begin to flash rapidly), other two HomeLink buttons to repeat steps 2 thru 4. operate any other compatible remotely controlled devices 5. Plug in the garage door opener around your home (lighting, motor, then test the HomeLink automatic gate, security system, button by pushing it for about 1 etc.).
208 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３４：０９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２１２
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Training With a Rolling Code TRAINING BUTTON 4. Press and hold the button on System HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds. For security purposes, newer garage door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’ 5. PressandholdtheHomeLink or variable code. Information from button again for 3 to 4 seconds. theremotecontrolandthegarage This should turn off the training door opener are needed before indicator on the garage door HomeLink can operate the garage opener unit. (Some systems may Features door opener. require you to press the button up to three times.) The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’ procedure trains HomeLink to the 6. Press the HomeLink button again. proper garage door opener code. It should operate the garage door. The following procedure 3. Press the training button on the synchronizes HomeLink to the garage door opener unit until the garage door opener so it sends and indicator next to the button comes receives the correct codes. on. The indicator may blink, or comeonandstayon.Youthen 1. Make sure you have properly have approximately 30 seconds to completed the ‘‘Training complete the following steps. HomeLink’’ procedure.
2. Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your garage door opener unit. The location will vary, depending on the manufacturer.
209 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３４：１９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２１３
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Erasing Codes If a standard transmitter was As required by the FCC: Toerasethecodesstoredinallthree programmed, the indicator will This device complies with Part 15 of the buttons, press and hold the two stay on for about 25 seconds. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the outside buttons until the red following two conditions: (1) This device indicator begins to flash, then 2. Once the HomeLink indicator may not cause harmful interference, and release the buttons. begins to flash slowly, continue to (2) this device must accept any hold the HomeLink button, and interference received, including Youshoulderaseallthreecodes follow steps 3 thru 6 under interference that may cause undesired before selling the vehicle. ‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page operation. 207). Retraining a Button Changes or modifications not expressly If you want to retrain a programmed Customer Assistance approved by the party responsible for button for a new device, you do not If you have problems with training compliance could void the user’s have to erase all button memory. the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, authority to operate the equipment. You can replace the existing memory or would like information on home code using this procedure: products that can be operated by This device complies with Industry HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On Canada Standard RSS-210. 1. PressandholdtheHomeLink the Internet, go to Operation is subject to the following two button to be trained until the www.homelink.com. conditions: (1) this device may not cause HomeLink indicator begins to interference, and (2) this device must flash slowly. HomeLink is a registered accept any interference that may cause If a rolling code transmitter was trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. undesired operation of the device. previously programmed, the indicator will flash rapidly for 2 seconds, and then stay on for about 23 seconds.
210 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３４：３４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２１４
HandsFreeLinkTM
Your vehicle is equipped with the Bluetooth Wireless Technology Incoming/Outgoing Calls HandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL uses Bluetooth is a registered trademark With a linked phone, the HFL allows Bluetooth technology as a wireless of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. you to send and receive calls in your link between it and your Bluetooth Bluetooth is the wireless technology vehicle without holding the phone. compatible cell phone. When you are that links your phone to the HFL. in your vehicle and your phone is TheHFLusesaClass3Bluetooth, Phonebook linked to the HFL, you’ll enjoy which means the maximum range The HFL can store up to 50 names hands-free phone use. The HFL is between your phone and vehicle is and phone numbers in its phonebook. Features available in both English and French 30 feet (10 meters). Withalinkedphone,youcanthen (Canadian models only). To change automatically dial any name or the language, see page225 . To use the HFL, your phone must number in the phonebook. have approved Bluetooth capability Here are the main features of the along with the Hands Free Profile. Here are the main components of HFL. Instructions for using the HFL This type of phone is available the HFL system: begin on page214 . through many phone makers and cellular carriers. You can also find an Microphone Voice Control approved phone by visiting The HFL microphone is on the HFL recognizes simple voice www.acura.com. ( In Canada, visit ceiling console. The microphone is commands, such as phone numbers www.acura.ca.) or by calling the Hands shared with the navigation system. and names. It uses these commands Free Link customer support at to automatically dial, receive, and (888) 528-7876. store numbers. For more information on voice control, see UsingVoiceControlonpage214 .
211 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３４：４０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２１５
HandsFreeLinkTM
Audio System HFL Buttons Here is the function of each HFL When the HFL is in use, the sound button: comes through the vehicle’s front Vehicle with navigation audio system speakers. If the audio system is shown HFLTalk:Thisbuttonisusedbefore system is in use while making a call, you give a command, to answer HFL TALK the HFL over-rides the audio system. BUTTON incoming calls, and to confirm To change the volume level, use the system information. audio system volume knob. HFL BACK BUTTON HFLBack:Thisbuttonisusedto endacall,gobacktotheprevious voice control command, and to cancel an operation. VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS
To operate the HFL, use the HFL Talk and Back buttons on the left side of the steering wheel. Below the HFL buttons is another set of voice control buttons for the navigation, climate control, and audio systems.
212 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３４：４７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２１６
HandsFreeLinkTM
Multi-Information Display Signal Strength＊ － Indicates the HFL Mode Message－ Indicates network signal strength of the when you are dialing and receiving SIGNAL BATTERY LEVEL STATUS current phone call. Five bars calls. STRENGTH equals full strength. Phone Dialing－ Indicates the ROAM Status＊ － Indicates your number you entered or the phone is roaming. number of the incoming call. Features Battery Level Status＊ － Indicates ＊ : Some phones do not send this ROAM the power remaining in your information to the HFL. STATUS phone’s current battery charge. Five bars equals full battery HFL MODE MESSAGE PHONE DIALING strength. When you are operating the HFL, or when you manually select HFL in the multi-information display, you will see this information in the display:
213 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３４：５７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２１７
HandsFreeLinkTM
How to Use the HFL Using Voice Control To hear a list of available options TheHFLisoperatedbytheHFL Here are some guidelines for using at any time, press the Talk button, Talk and Back buttons on the left voice control: wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Hands side of the steering wheel. The next To enter a command, press the free help.’’ few pages provide instructions for all Talk button. Then, after the beep, basic features of the HFL.say your command in a clear, Many commands can be spoken natural tone. together. For example, you can NOTE: All phones may not say, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’ operate identically, and some may For best system operation, set the cause inconsistent operation of the climate control fan speed to low, To enter a string of numbers in a HFL. and direct the center vents away Call or Dial command, you can say from the microphone in the ceiling. them all at once, or you can separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7, If the HFL does not recognize a 10, or 11. command, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’ If it doesn’t recognize the To skip a voice prompt, press the command a second time, its Talk button while the HFL is response is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If it speaking. The HFL will then begin doesn’t recognize the command a listening for your next command. third time, it plays the Help prompt.
214 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３５：０５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２１８
HandsFreeLinkTM
To go back one step in a command When you finish a command 2. Press and release the Talk button. process, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or press sequence, the HFL goes back to After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The the Back button. its main menu. For example, when HFL response is ‘‘Would you like If nothing is said while the HFL is you store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ the male or female prompts?’’ listening for a command, the HFL HFL response is, ‘‘Eric has been will time out and stop its voice stored.’’ The next time you press 3. Press and release the Talk button. recognition. The next time you the Talk button, you will be at the After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or press the Talk button, the HFL main menu. ‘‘Female,’’ depending on the Features begins listening from the point at system voice you want. The HFL which it timed out. Setting Up the System response is, ‘‘Male (Female) ThevoiceoftheHFLcanbesetto prompts have been selected. To end a command sequence at male or female (U.S. models only). Would you like an audible any time, press and hold the Back Also, the incoming notification can notification of an incoming call?’’ button, or press the Talk button, be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Cancel.’’ notification. ThenexttimeyoupresstheTalk button, the HFL begins from its To set up the system, do this: main menu. 1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘System options are setup and clear.’’
CONTINUED
215 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３５：１３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２１９
HandsFreeLinkTM
4. Press and release the Talk button. Pairing Your Phone NOTE: If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the Your Bluetooth compatible phone HFL does not allow you to pair HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like with HandsFree Profile must be your phone if the vehicle is a ring tone or a prompt?’’ If you paired to the HFL before you can moving. say ‘‘No’’ after the beep, the HFL make and receive hands-free calls. For pairing, your phone must be in returns to its main menu. Saying its Discovery mode. ‘‘No’’ will result in no ring tone or Up to six phones can be paired to prompt playback during an the HFL. incoming call. The audio system The following procedure works for will still mute, and a message will most phones. If you cannot pair be displayed. your phone to the HFL with this procedure, refer to your phone’s 5. Press and release the Talk button. operating manual, talk to your After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or phone retailer, or call the ‘‘Prompt.’’ If you choose ‘‘Ring HandsFreeLink customer support tone’’ you will hear a ring tone at (888) 528-7876. through the audio speakers to During the pairing process, turn announce an incoming call. If you off any previously paired phones choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you will hear before pairing a new phone. this message to announce an incoming call: ‘‘You have an incoming call.’’
216 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３５：２１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２２０
HandsFreeLinkTM
1.With your phone on and the 4. Press and release the Talk button. 7. Press and release the Talk button. ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The After the beep, say the name you ON (II) position, press and release HFL response is ‘‘Searching for a want to use. For example, say the Talk button. After the beep, Bluetooth phone. Make sure the ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL response say ‘‘Phone set up.’’ The HFL phone you are trying to pair is in is ‘‘Eric’s phone has been response is ‘‘Phone set up options Discovery mode.’’ successfully paired. Returning to are status, pair, edit, delete, and the main menu.’’ list.’’ NOTE: Steps 5 and 6 show a Features common way to get your phone into 8. If you want to pair another phone, 2. Press and release the Talk button. its Discovery mode. If these steps do repeat steps 1 through 7. After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The not work on your phone, refer to the HFL response is ‘‘The pairing phone’s operating manual. process requires operation of your mobile phone. For safety, only 5. Follow the prompts on your phone perform this function while the togetitintoitsDiscoverymode. vehicle is stopped. State a four- The phone will search for the HFL. digit code for pairing. Note this When it comes up, select code. It will be requested by the HandsFreeLink from the list of phone.’’ options displayed on your phone.
3. Press and release the Talk button. 6. When asked by the phone, enter After the beep, say the four-digit the four-digit code from step 3 into code you want to use. For example, your phone. The HFL response is say‘‘1,2,3,4.’’TheHFLresponse ‘‘A new phone has been found. is,‘‘1,2,3,4.Isthiscorrect?’’ What would you like to name this phone?’’ CONTINUED
217
218
eunn otemi menu.’’ main the to Returning
s ‘h aehsbe changed. been has name ‘‘The is,
‘iaspoe’ h F response HFL The phone.’’ ‘‘Lisa’s
ftepoe o xml,say example, For phone. the of
fe h ep a h e name new the say beep, the After
4. rs n ees h akbutton. Talk the release and Press
odlt rcsphone?’’ Eric’s delete to e aefrEi’ phone?’’ Eric’s for name new
F epnei ‘ol o like you ‘‘Would is response HFL h F epnei ‘hti the is ‘‘What is response HFL The
xml a ‘rcspoe’ The phone.’’ ‘‘Eric’s say example o xml,sy‘Ei’ phone.’’ ‘‘Eric’s say example, For
h hn o att eee For delete. to want you phone the h hn o att rename. to want you phone the
deleted. fe h ep a h aeof name the say beep, the After fe h ep a h aeof name the say beep, the After
3. 3. r‘Cne,’tepoewl o be not will phone the ‘‘Cancel,’’ or rs n ees h akbutton. Talk the release and Press rs n ees h akbutton. Talk the release and Press
anmn.’I o a ‘oback,’’ ‘‘Go say you If menu.’’ main
endltd eunn othe to Returning deleted. been ol o iet delete?’’ to like you would ol o iet edit?’’ to like you would
F epnei ‘h hn has phone ‘‘The is response HFL F epnei,‘Wihphone ‘‘Which is, response HFL F epnei ‘hc phone ‘‘Which is response HFL
fyusy‘O’ fe h ep the beep, the after ‘‘OK’’ say you If fe h ep a ‘eee’ The ‘‘Delete.’’ say beep, the After fe h ep a ‘dt’ The ‘‘Edit.’’ say beep, the After
5. 2. 2. rs n ees h akbutton. Talk the release and Press rs n ees h akbutton. Talk the release and Press rs n ees h akbutton. Talk the release and Press
r‘‘Cancel.’’ or eee n list.’’ and delete, eee n list.’’ and delete,
otne tews,sy‘G back,’’ ‘‘Go say Otherwise, continue. eu pin r tts ar edit, pair, status, are options setup eu pin r tts ar edit, pair, status, are options setup
eeeEi’ hn.’Sy‘O’ to ‘‘OK’’ Say phone.’’ Eric’s delete h F epnei,‘‘Phone is, response HFL The h F epnei ‘‘Phone is response HFL The
F epnei ‘rprn to ‘‘Preparing is response HFL fe h ep a ‘hn setup.’’ ‘‘Phone say beep, the After fe h ep a ‘hn setup.’’ ‘‘Phone say beep, the After
.1. 1. fe h ep a ‘e.’The ‘‘Yes.’’ say beep, the After rs n ees h akbutton. Talk the release and Press rs n ees h akbutton. Talk the release and Press
4. rs n ees h akbutton. Talk the release and Press ornm ardpoe oti:T eeeapie hn,d this: do phone, paired a delete To this: do phone, paired a rename To
HandsFreeLink
TM ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３５：３１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２２１
219
anmenu.’’ main
hn sraig eunn othe to Returning roaming. is phone eunn otemi menu.’’ main the to Returning
teghi iebr,adthe and bars, five is strength ‘h niels a enread. been has list entire ‘‘The
teghi he as Signal bars. three is strength enra,teHLrsos is response HFL the read, been
‘rcspoei ikd Battery linked. is phone ‘‘Eric’s hnspie otesse have system the to paired phones
xml fteHLrsos is, response HFL the of example fec ardpoe hnall When phone. paired each of linked.
fe h ep a ‘tts’ An ‘‘Status.’’ say beep, the After F epnsb itn h name the listing by responds HFL on,tefrtpoeremains phone first the found,
2. rs n ees h akbutton. Talk the release and Press fe h ep a ‘it’ The ‘‘List.’’ say beep, the After hn.I oohrpoe are phones other no If phone.
2. rs n ees h akbutton. Talk the release and Press n erhsfraohrpaired another for searches and
Features
hndsoncstelne phone linked the disconnects then eee n list.’’ and delete,
o h etpoe’ h HFL The phone.’’ next the for eu pin r tts ar edit, pair, status, are options setup eee n list.’’ and delete,
h F epnei ‘‘Searching is response HFL The h F epnei ‘‘Phone is response HFL The eu pin r tts ar edit, pair, status, are options setup
fe h ep a ‘etphone.’’ ‘‘Next say beep, the After fe h ep a ‘hn setup.’’ ‘‘Phone say beep, the After h F epnei ‘‘Phone is response HFL The
1. 1. rs n ees h akbutton. Talk the release and Press rs n ees h akbutton. Talk the release and Press fe h ep a ‘hn setup.’’ ‘‘Phone say beep, the After
1. rs n ees h akbutton. Talk the release and Press hn oaohrpie hn,d this: do phone, paired another to phone this: do used,
ocag rmtecretylinked currently the from change To being phone the of status the out find To this: do phones, paired all list To
HandsFreeLink
TM ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３５：３９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２２２ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３５：４９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２２３
HandsFreeLinkTM
Making a Call 3. Press and release the Talk button. ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is You can make calls using any phone After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ ‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’ number, or by using a name in the The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or HFL phonebook. You can also redial ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you 3. Press and release the Talk button. the last number called. During a call, will hear the person you called After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The theHFLallowsyoutotalkupto30 through the audio speakers. To HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or minutes after you remove the key change the volume, use the audio ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you from the ignition switch. system volume knob. will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To To make a call using a phone number, 4. To end the call, press the Back change the volume, use the audio do this: button. system volume knob. 1. With your phone on and the ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or To make a call using a name in the HFL 4. To end the call, press the Back ON (II) position, press and release phonebook, do this: button. the Talk button. After the beep, 1. With your phone on and the say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or To redial the last number called by response is, ‘‘What name or ON (II) position, press and release the phone, press and release the number would you like to call/ the Talk button. After the beep, Talk button. After the beep, say dial?’’ say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL ‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is, response is ‘‘What name or ‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, you 2. Press and release the Talk button. number would you like to call/ will hear the person you called After the beep, say the number dial?’’ through the audio speakers. To you want to call. For example, say change the volume, use the audio ‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL response 2. Press and release the Talk button. system volume knob. is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, or After the beep, say the name you continue to add numbers.’’ want to call. For example, say
220 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３５：５９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２２４
HandsFreeLinkTM
Sending Numbers or Names 3. Press and release the Talk button. Receiving a Call During a Call After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The If you receive a call when you are not The HFL allows you to send dial tones will be sent, and the call on the phone, the HFL interrupts the numbers or names during a call. This will continue. audio system (if it is on), and plays is useful when you call a menu- the incoming call notification, if driven phone system. You can also To send a name during a call, do this: activated. To answer the call, press program account numbers into the 1. Press and release the Talk button. the Talk button and begin speaking. HFL phonebook for easy retrieval After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The If you don’t want to answer the call, Features during menu-driven calls. HFL response is ‘‘What name or press the Back button. number would you like to send?’’ To send a number during a call, do this: If your phone has Call Waiting, and 1. Press and release the Talk button. 2. Press and release the Talk button. you receive a call when you are on After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The After the beep, say the name you the phone, press and release the HFL response is, ‘‘What name or want to send. For example, say Talk button to answer it. When you number would you like to send?’’ ‘‘Account number.’’ The HFL do this, the original call is placed on response is ‘‘Would you like to hold. To return to the original call, 2. Press and release the Talk button. send account number?’’ press the Talk button again. If you After the beep, say the number don’t want to answer the new call, you want to send. For example, 3. Press and release the Talk button. disregard it, and continue with your say‘‘1,2,3.’’TheHFLresponseis After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The original call. If you want to hang up ‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue to dial tones will be sent, and the call the original call and answer the new add numbers.’’ will continue. call, press the Back button.
221 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３６：１５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２２５
HandsFreeLinkTM
Transferring a Call To mute your voice, do this: To add a name, do this: During a call, you can transfer it 1. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button. from the HFL to your phone, or from After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ your phone to the HFL. HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, and To transfer a call from the HFL to your To unmute your voice, do this: list.’’ phone, do this: 2. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The 2. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ The The audio switches from the HFL canceled.’’ HFL response is, ‘‘What name to the phone. would you like to store?’’ Setting up the Phonebook To transfer a call from your phone to the The HFL phonebook can store up 3. Press and release the Talk button. HFL, do this: to 50 names with their associated After the beep, say the name you 2. Press and release the Talk button. numbers. These can be any types would like to store. For example, After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ of numbers. For example, you can say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’ The audio switches from your store a phone number and use it to The HFL response is ‘‘What is the phone to the HFL. make a call, or you can store an number for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is the account number and use it during number for account number?’’ Muting a Call a call to a menu-driven phone During a call, you can mute or system. 4. Press and release the Talk button. unmute your voice to the person you After the beep, say the number. are talking to. For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘123 456 7891.’’
222 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３６：２６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２２６
HandsFreeLinkTM
5. Press and release the Talk button. 4.Press and release the Talk button. 3. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The After the beep, say the new After the beep, say the name you HFL response is ‘‘Eric (or account number for Eric. For example, say would like to delete. For example, number) has been stored. ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL response say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is Returning to the main menu.’’ is, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ ‘‘Do you want to delete Eric?’’
To edit the number of a name, do this: 5. Press and release the Talk button. 4. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The Features After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ HFL response is ‘‘The number has HFL response is, ‘‘The name has The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook been changed. Returning to the been deleted. Returning to the options are store, edit, delete, and main menu.’’ main menu.’’ list.’’ To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, do 2. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button. this: After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ 1. Press and release the Talk button. HFL response is, ‘‘What name The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonebook After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ would you like to edit?’’ options are store, edit, delete, and The HFL response is, ‘‘The list.’’ Phonebook options are store, edit, 3. Press and release the Talk button. delete, and list.’’ After the beep, say the name you 2. Press and release the Talk button. would like to edit. For example, After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is HFL response is, ‘‘What name ‘‘What is the new number for would you like to delete?’’ Eric?’’
CONTINUED
223 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３６：３６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２２７
HandsFreeLinkTM
2. Press and release the Talk button. 3. Press and release the Talk button. 2. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The HFL responds by listing the HFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Once HFL response is, ‘‘This process names in the phonebook. When connected, you will hear the will clear all paired phones, clear the end of the list is reached, the person you called through the all entries in the phonebook, and HFL response is, ‘‘The entire list audio speakers. To change the clear the passcode. Is this what has been read. Returning to the volume, use the audio system you would like to do?’’ main menu.’’ volume knob. 3. Press and release the Talk button. To call a name from the phonebook list, Clearing the System After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The do this: This operation clears the HFL of HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to 1. Press and release the Talk button. your passcode, your paired phones, clear all paired phones, all After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ andallnamesintheHFLphonebook. phonebook entries, and the The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook Clearing is recommended before you passcode. This may take up to 2 options are store, edit, delete, and sell your vehicle. minutes to complete.’’ Press and list.’’ release the Talk button. After the To clear the system, do this: beep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed, or say 2. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button. ‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’ After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The HFL responds by listing the HFL response is, ‘‘System options 4. If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a short names in the phonebook. When it are setup and clear.’’ period of time, the HFL response saysthenameyouwanttocall,for is, ‘‘System has been cleared. example, Eric, press the Talk Returning to the main menu.’’ button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’
224 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３６：４７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２２８
HandsFreeLinkTM
Changing Language If there are paired phones without To change from French to English, do (Canadian Models Only) French name tags, the HFL this: To change from English to French, do response is ‘‘Pour que le système 1. Press and release the Talk button. this: identifie les téléphones qui ont été After the beep, say ‘‘Changer 1. Press and release the Talk button. jumelés dans une autre langue, les Langue.’’ The HFL response is, After the beep, say ‘‘Change noms des téléphones doivent être ‘‘English or Français?’’ language.’’ The HFL response is ré-enregistrés.’’ ‘‘English or Français?’’ 2. Press and release the Talk button. Features NOTE: If there are paired phones After the beep, say ‘‘English.’’ The 2. Press and release the Talk button. without French name tags the HFL response is, ‘‘You have After the beep, say ‘‘Français.’’ following prompts will continue. selected English. Name tags that The HFL response is ‘‘Vous avez were stored while in French mode sélectionné Français. Les noms 4. The HFL response is, for example, will not be accessible in English enregistrés en mode Anglais ne ‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour ＜ mode. Would you like to seront pas accessible en mode Paul’s phone＞ ?’’ Press and continue?’’ Français. Voulez-vous continuer?’’ release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’ 3. Press and release the Talk button. 3. Press and release the Talk button. The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est le After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ If there After the beep, say ‘‘Oui.’’ If there nom Français pour＜ Pat’s phone are no paired phones without are no paired phones without ＞?’’ Press and release the Talk English name tags, the HFL French name tags, the HFL button. Say ‘‘Téléphone de Pat.’’ response is ‘‘The language has response is ‘‘La langue a été After all paired phones missing a been changed. Returning to the changée. Retour au menu principal.’’ French name tag are re-recorded, main menu.’’ the HFL will prompt, ‘‘Retour au menu principal.’’ CONTINUED
225 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３６：５１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２２９
HandsFreeLinkTM
If there are paired phones without 4. The HFL says, for example, ‘‘What English name tags, the HFL is the English name for ＜ response is ‘‘The language has been Téléphone de Paul＞ ?’’ Press and changed. For the system to identify release the Talk button. After the phones that were paired while in beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ The another language, the phone names HFL response is ‘‘What is the need to be re-recorded.’’ English name for＜ Téléphone de Pat＞ ?’’ Press and release the Talk NOTE: If there are paired phones button. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’s without English name tags, the phone.’’ After all paired phones following prompts will continue. missing an English name tag are re-recorded, the HFL will say ‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’
226 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３６：５５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２３０
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period...... 228 vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation...... 228 gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures...... 229 levels of important fluids. You also Refueling...... 229 need to know how to properly store OpeningandClosingthe luggage or packages. The Hood...... 230 information in this section will help Oil Check...... 232 you. If you plan to add any Engine Coolant Check...... 232 accessories to your vehicle, please Fuel Economy...... 233 read the information in this section Improving Fuel Economy...... 233 Driving Before first. Accessories and Modifications... . 234 Accessories...... 234 Modifying Your Vehicle...... 235 Carrying Cargo...... 236 Load Limits...... 237 Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on a Roof Rack...... 238 Carrying Items in the Passenger Compartment...... 238
227 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３７：０７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２３１
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation recommend, in areas where it is Help assure your vehicle’s future Your vehicle is designed to operate available, the use of gasoline that reliability and performance by paying on premium unleaded gasoline with a does NOT contain manganese-based extra attention to how you drive pump octane number of 91 or higher. fuel additives such as MMT. during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). Useofaloweroctanegasolinecan Use of gasoline with these additives During this period: cause occasional metallic knocking may adversely affect performance, noises in the engine and will result in and cause the malfunction indicator Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid decreased engine performance. Use lamp on your instrument panel to acceleration. of a gasoline with a pump octane come on. If this happens, contact number less than 87 can lead to your authorized dealer for service. Do not change the oil until the engine damage. scheduled maintenance time. On vehicles with manual transmission Some gasoline today is blended with You may hear a knocking noise from oxygenates such as ethanol or Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst the engine if you drive the vehicle at MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to 200 miles (300 km). low engine speed (below about 1,000 operate on oxygenated gasoline rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this, containing up to 10 % ethanol by Do not tow a trailer. raise the engine speed by shifting to volume and up to 15 % MTBE by a lower gear. volume. Do not use gasoline You should also follow these containing methanol. recommendations with an We recommend quality gasoline If you notice any undesirable overhauled or exchanged engine, or containing detergent additives that operating symptoms, try another when the brakes are replaced. help prevent fuel system and engine service station or switch to another deposits. brand of gasoline. In addition, in order to maintain good For further important fuel-related performance, fuel economy, and information, please refer to your emissions control, we strongly Quick Start Guide.
228 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３７：１６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２３２
Service Station Procedure
Refueling
Gasoline is highly flammable TETHER Push and explosive. You can be ATTACHMENT burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away. Handle fuel only outdoors. Driving Before Wipe up spills immediately.
FUEL FILL CAP 1. Park with the driver’s side closest 3. Removethefuelfillcapslowly. to the gas pump. You may hear a hissing sound as pressure inside the tank escapes. 2. To open the fuel fill door, push The fuel fill cap is attached to the down on the lever located to the fuel filler with a tether. Put the left of the driver’s seat. attachment on the fuel fill cap into the slit on the fuel fill door.
CONTINUED
229 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３７：２３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２３３
Service Station Procedure
4.Stop filling the tank after the fuel 5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Opening and Closing the Hood nozzle automatically clicks off. Do until it clicks at least once. If you not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave do not properly tighten the cap, HOOD RELEASE HANDLE some room for the fuel to expand the malfunction indicator lamp with temperature changes. maycomeon(seepage324 ).You will also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off CAP’’ message in the information even though the tank is not full, display. there may be a problem with your vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery 6. Push the fuel fill door closed until system. The system helps keep it latches. fuel vapors from going into the atmosphere. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult your dealer. To Open the Hood: 1. Park the vehicle, and set the parking brake. Pull the hood release handle located under the lower left corner of the dashboard. The hood will pop up slightly.
230 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３７：３３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２３４
Service Station Procedure
To Close the Hood: Lift it up slightly to remove the LATCH GRIP SUPPORT ROD support rod from the hole. Put the support rod back into its holding clip. Lower the hood to about a foot (30cm)abovethefender,thenletit drop. Make sure it is securely latched. eoeDriving Before
CLIP 2. Put your fingers under the front 3. Pull the support rod out of its clip edge of the hood near the center. by holding the grip, and insert the Slide your hand to the left until end into the designated hole in the you feel the hood latch handle. hood. Push this handle up to release it. Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the handle, the mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
231 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３７：４４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２３５
Service Station Procedure
Oil Check Engine Coolant Check
RESERVE TANK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK MAX MIN DIPSTICK (orange handle)
Wait a few minutes after turning the 4. Remove the dipstick again, and Look at the coolant level in the engine off before you check the oil. check the level. It should be radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is between the upper and lower between the MAX and MIN lines. If 1. Remove the dipstick (orange marks. it is below the MIN line, see Adding handle). Engine Coolant on page283 for If it is near or below the lower mark, informationonaddingtheproper 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean seeAdding Engine Oil on page278 . coolant. cloth or paper towel. Refer to Owner’s Maintenance 3. Insert it all the way back in its hole. Checks on page273 for information about checking other items on your vehicle.
232 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３７：５１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２３６
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy Always drive in the highest gear Always maintain your vehicle possible. according to the maintenance messages given by the multi- Try to maintain a constant speed. information display. See Owner’s Everytimeyouslowdownand Maintenance Checks on page speed up, your vehicle uses extra 273 . fuel. Use cruise control when appropriate. For example, an underinflated tire causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’ Combine several short trips into Driving Before which uses more fuel. one.
The build-up of snow or mud on The air conditioning puts an extra your vehicle’s underside adds load on the engine which makes it weight and rolling resistance. usemorefuel.Usethefresh-air Frequent cleaning helps your fuel ventilation when possible. mileage and reduces the chance of corrosion.
Drive moderately. Rapid acceleration, abrupt cornering, and hard braking use more fuel.
233 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３８：００ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２３７
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory: some non-Acura accessories, can make your vehicle unsafe. Before Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not you make any modifications or add modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere anyaccessories,besuretoreadthe vehicle’s handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or following information. performance, and cause a performance. crash in which you can be hurt Accessories or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do Your dealer has Acura accessories not overload electrical circuits that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this (see page330 ) or interfere with vehicle. These accessories have owner’s manual regarding proper operation of your vehicle. been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications. vehicle, and are covered by warranty. Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer Although non-Acura accessories may When properly installed, cellular contact your dealer for assistance. fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and If possible, have your dealer meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should inspect the final installation. could adversely affect your vehicle’s not interfere with your vehicle’s handling and stability. computer controlled systems, such Do not install accessories on the as your airbags and anti-lock brakes. side pillars or across the rear windows. In these areas, accessories may interfere with proper operation of the side curtain airbags.
234 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３８：０８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２３８
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tires Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of or replacing components with non- your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and Acura components could seriously other systems. affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or any other part of your vehicle’s Some examples are: safety systems could make the Lowering the vehicle with a non- systems ineffective. Acura suspension kit that Driving Before significantly reduces ground If you plan to modify your vehicle, clearance can allow the consult your dealer. undercarriage to hit speed bumps or other raised objects, which could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a non- Acura suspension kit can affect the handling and stability.
Non-Acura wheels, because they are a universal design, can cause excessive stress on suspension components.
235 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３８：１６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２３９
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient DOOR POCKET storage areas: CENTER POCKET Glove box
Door pockets
Trunk, including the back seats when folded down
Center pocket
Console compartment
Roof-rack (if installed)
However, carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. Before carrying any CONSOLE type of cargo, be sure to read the COMPARTMENT following pages.
TRUNK GLOVE BOX
236 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３８：２６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２４０
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits Steps for determining correct load (850－× 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.) The maximum load for your vehicle limit: is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S.A, 395 kg 5. Determine the combined weight for Canada. This figure includes the 1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the of luggage and cargo being loaded total weight of all occupants, cargo, combined weight of occupants and on the vehicle. The weight may and accessories, and the tongue load cargo should never exceed 850 unsafely exceed the available if you are towing a trailer. lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard. cargo and luggage load capacity in (The placard is on the driver’s step 4. doorjamb). 6. Ifyourvehiclewillbetowinga Driving Before Overloading or improper 2. Determine the combined weight trailer, load from your trailer will loading can affect handling and of the driver and passengers that be transferred to your vehicle. stability and cause a crash in will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine which you can be hurt or killed. how this reduces the available 3. Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity of Follow all load limits and other the driver and passengers from yourvehicle(seepage258 ). loading guidelines in this 850 lbs. manual. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the maximum load is 850 lbs and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 100 lbs. CONTINUED
237 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３８：３５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２４１
Carrying Cargo
In addition, the total weight of the If you carry large items that Carrying Items in the Passenger vehicle, all passengers, accessories, prevent you from closing the trunk Compartment cargo, and trailer tongue load must lid, exhaust gas can enter the Store or secure all items that could not exceed the Gross Vehicle passenger area. To avoid the be thrown around and hurt Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross possibility of carbon monoxide someone during a crash. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both poisoning, follow the instructions areonalabelonthedriver’s on page56 . Besureitemsplacedonthefloor doorjamb. behind the front seats cannot roll If you carry any items on a roof under the seats and interfere with Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on rack, be sure the total weight of the driver’s ability to operate the a Roof Rack the rack and the items does not pedals or the seat. Distribute cargo evenly on the exceed 165 lbs (75 kg). floor of the trunk, placing the Keep the glove box closed while heaviest items on the bottom and If you use an accessory roof rack, driving. If it is open, a passenger as far forward as possible. Tie the roof rack weight limit may be could injure their knees during a down items that could be thrown lower. Refer to the information that crash or sudden stop. about the vehicle during a crash or came with your roof rack. sudden stop. Do not put any items on top of the rear shelf. They can block your Ifyoufolddownthebackseat,tie viewandbethrownaroundthe down items that could be thrown vehicle during a crash. about the vehicle during a crash or sudden stop.
238 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３８：３９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２４２
Driving
This section gives you tips on Preparing to Drive...... 240 starting the engine under various Starting the Engine...... 241 conditions, and how to operate the Manual Transmission...... 242 manual and automatic transmissions. Recommended Shift Points...... 242 It also includes important Engine Speed Limiter...... 243 information on parking your vehicle, Reverse Lockout...... 243 the braking system, the vehicle Automatic Transmission...... 244 stability assist (VSA) system, and Shift Lever Position facts you need if you are planning to Indicators...... 244 tow a trailer. Shifting...... 244 Sequential SportShift Mode.... . 246 Engine Speed Limiter...... 249 Driving Shift Lock Release...... 249 Parking...... 251 Parking Tips...... 251 Braking System...... 252 Brake System Design...... 252 Brake Wear Indicators...... 252 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...... 253 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System...... 255 VSA OFF Switch...... 256 VSA and Tire Sizes...... 256 Towing a Trailer...... 257
239 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３８：５０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２４３
Preparing to Drive
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks 6. Check the seat adjustment (see 11. When you start the engine, check and adjustments before you drive pages138 and139 ). the gauges and indicators in the your vehicle. instrument panel and the 7. Check the adjustment of the messages in the multi-information 1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, inside and outside mirrors (see display (see pages61 and 76 ). and outside lights are clean and pages145 and 146 ). unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, or ice. 8. Check the steering wheel adjustment (see page124 ). 2. Check that the hood is fully closed. 9. Make sure the doors are securely 3. Check that the trunk is fully closed and locked. closed. 10. Fasten your seat belt. Check that 4. Visually check the tires. If a tire your passengers have fastened looks low, use a gauge to check its their seat belts (see page17 ). pressure.
5. Check that any items you may be carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.
240 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３９：００ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２４４
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake. 4. Without touching the accelerator 6. If the engine fails to start, press pedal, turn the ignition key to the the accelerator pedal all the way 2. In cold weather, turn off all START (III) position. Do not hold downandholdittherewhile electrical accessories to reduce the key in the START (III) starting to clear flooding. Return the drain on the battery. position for more than 15 seconds to step 5 if the engine does not at a time. If the engine does not start. 3. Manual transmission: start right away, pause for at least Push the clutch pedal down all the 10 seconds before trying again. way. The engine is harder to start in cold Automatic transmission: weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at Make sure the shift lever is in The immobilizer system protects your altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400 Driving Park. Press on the brake pedal. vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly- meters) adds to this problem. coded key (or other device) is used, the engine’s f uel system is disabled. For more inf ormation, see page126 .
5. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, or starts but stalls right away, repeat step 4 with the accelerator pedal pressed halfway down. If the engine starts, release pressure on the accelerator pedal so the engine does not race.
241 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３９：０７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２４５
Manual Transmission
Come to a full stop before you shift into reverse. You can damage the transmission by trying to shift into Rapid slowing or speeding-up reverse with the vehicle moving. can cause loss of control on Push down the clutch pedal, and slippery surfaces. If you crash, pause for a few seconds before you can be injured. shifting into reverse, or shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. Use extra care when driving on This stops the gears so they won’t slippery surfaces. ‘‘grind.’’ Recommended Shift Points When slowing down, you can get Drive in the highest gear that lets extra braking from the engine by the engine run and accelerate The manual transmission is syn- shifting to a lower gear. This extra smoothly. This will give you good chronizedinallforwardgearsfor braking can help you maintain a safe fuel economy and effective emis- smooth operation. When shifting up speed and prevent your brakes from sions control. The following shift or down, make sure you push the overheating while going down a points are recommended: clutch pedal down all the way, shift steep hill. Before downshifting, to the next gear, and let the pedal up make sure the engine speed will not Shift up Normal acceleration gradually. When you are not shifting, go into the tachometer’s red zone in do not rest your foot on the clutch the lower gear. Downshift one gear 1st to 2nd 12 mph (19 km/h) pedal. This can cause your clutch to at a time. 2nd to 3rd 23 mph (37 km/h) wear out faster. 3rd to 4th 34 mph (54 km/h) 4th to 5th 45 mph (72 km/h) 5th to 6th 56 mph (90 km/h)
242 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３９：１５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２４６
Manual Transmission
Engine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout 1. Apply the parking brake, and turn If you exceed the maximum speed The 6-speed manual transmission the ignition key to the for the gear you are in, the engine has an electric lockout so you cannot ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) speed will enter into the tachometer’s accidentally shift from fifth to position. red zone. If this occurs, you may feel reverse instead of sixth while the the engine cut in and out. This is vehicle is moving. If you cannot shift 2. Press the clutch pedal, and shift to caused by a limiter in the engine’s to reverse when the vehicle is reverse. computer controls. The engine will stopped: run normally when you reduce the 3. With the clutch pedal still pressed, rpm below the red zone. start the engine.
Before downshifting, make sure the If you need to use this procedure to Driving engine will not go into the shift to reverse, your vehicle may be tachometer’s red zone. developing a problem. Have the vehicle checked by your dealer.
243 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３９：２３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２４７
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position IndicatorsIf the malfunction indicator lamp Shifting comes on along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator, there is a problem in the automatic transmission control SHIFT LEVER system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and have the transmission checked by your dealer as soon as possible.
When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a possible problem with the transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK TRANSMISSION’’ message in the multi-information display (see page These indicators in the tachometer 82 ). show which position the shift lever is To shift from any position, move the in. shiftlever.Youcannotshiftoutof Park when the ignition switch is in The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a the LOCK (0) or the ACCESSORY few seconds when you turn the (I) position. ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it flashes while driving (in any shift position), it indicates a possible problem in the transmission.
244 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３９：３１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２４８
Automatic Transmission
To shift from: Do this: To avoid transmission damage, come Neutral (N) － Use neutral if you PtoR Press the brake pedal to a complete stop before shifting need to restart a stalled engine, or if and move the lever. into Park. The shift lever must be in it is necessary to stop briefly with RtoP Park before you can remove the key the engine idling. Shift to the Park NtoR from the ignition switch. position if you need to leave your DtoD3 vehicle and apply the parking brake. DtoN Move the lever. Reverse (R) － Press the brake Press on the brake pedal when you DtoD3 pedal, and move the shift lever from are moving the shift lever from NtoD Park to reverse. To shift from neutral to another gear. RtoN reverse to neutral, come to a completestop,andthenshift. Drive (D) － Use this position for Park (P) － This position mechani- your normal driving. The Driving cally locks the transmission. Use transmission automatically selects a Park whenever you are turning off or suitable gear for the vehicle speed starting the engine. To shift out of and acceleration. You may notice the Park, you must press on the brake transmission shifting up at higher pedal and have your foot off the speeds when the engine is cold. This accelerator pedal. helps the engine warm up faster.
If you have done all of the above and still cannot move the lever out of Park, seeShift Lock Release on page249 .
CONTINUED
245 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３９：３７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２４９
Automatic Transmission
Drive (D3 ) －This position is similar Sequential SportShift Mode － With to D, except only the first three the shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position, you gears are selected instead of all five. can select the Sequential SportShift Use D3 when towing a trailer in hilly Mode to shift gears; much like a terrain, or to provide engine braking manual transmission, but without a when going down a steep hill. D3 can clutch pedal. also keep the transmission from cycling between third and fourth To enter the Sequential SportShift gears in stop-and-go driving. mode, move the shift lever further to the driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D,’’ move the shift lever to the passenger’s side. SELECTED GEAR
When you move the shift lever from ‘‘D’’ to ‘‘M’’ position, the display shows the selected gear.
In Sequential SportShift mode, each time you push forward on the shift lever, the transmission shifts to a higher gear. Pull back on the lever to downshift. The number of the gear selected is displayed on the instrument panel.
246 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３９：４７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２５０
Automatic Transmission
The transmission may automatically Downshifting gives you more power downshift from the higher gear to when climbing, and provides engine the lower gear under the following brakingwhengoingdownasteephill. conditions: Up shift The transmission will also shift The vehicle speeds drops below automatically as the vehicle comes to 5→ 4:33mph(52km/h) a complete stop. It will downshift to Down shift 4→ 3:20mph(32km/h) first gear when the vehicle speed is If you drive uphill between under 6 mph (10 km/h). 54:4533mph→－ (72－ 52 km/h) If you try to manually downshift at a 43:3320mph→－ speed that would cause the engine to Driving (52－ 32 km/h) exceed the redline in a lower gear, When you accelerate away from a 32:2010mph→－ the transmission will not downshift. stop, the transmission will be in first (32－ 16 km/h) Thegearindicatorwillflashthe gear. The transmission will not If you press the brake pedal as you numberofthelowergearseveral automatically upshift. Watch the drive downhill. times, then return to the higher gear. tachometer and upshift manually before the engine reaches redline. If the vehicle speed slows to below the redline of the selected lower gear The transmission remains in the position while the indicator is selectedgear(5,4,3,2,or1).There flashing, the transmission will is no automatic downshift when you downshift and the display will show push the accelerator pedal to the the selected lower gear. floor. CONTINUED
247 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：３９：５５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２５１
Automatic Transmission
The table shows the speed ranges Starting in Second Gear for upshifting and downshifting. To shift from Speed range When you are in Sequential SportShift mode, and the vehicle is 21→ under 31 mph stopped, push forward on the shift To shift from Speed range (50 km/h) lever to shift to second gear. You will see ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting out in 12→ over 0 mph 32→ under 69 mph second gear will help to reduce (0 km/h) (110 km/h) wheelspin in deep snow or on a slippery surface. 23→ over 6 mph 43→ under 88 mph (10 km/h) (140 km/h) If you start out in second gear, the transmission will be fixed in that 34→ over 20 mph 54→ under 131 mph gear. (32 km/h) (210 km/h) The transmission will not 45→ over 33 mph automatically downshift to first gear (52 km/h) even when the vehicle speed is under 6 mph (10 km/h). You need to shift down to first gear manually.
248
249
CONTINUED
eoeit. remove
ntentho h oe to cover the of notch the on
ea igralfl,crflypry carefully file, fingernail metal
ml lttpe cedie ra or screwdriver flat-tipped small a
hf okrlaeso oe.Using cover. slot release lock shift
3. Putaclothonthenotchofthe
Driving
switch.
2. p eo h e zone. red the below rpm eoetekyfo h ignition the from key the Remove
u omlywe o euethe reduce you when normally run
1. optrcnrl.Teegn will engine The controls. computer e h akn brake. parking the Set
asdb iie nteengine’s the in limiter a by caused
h niecti n u.Ti is This out. and in cut engine the utnde o work. not does button
e oe fti cus o a feel may you occurs, this If zone. red ea n rsigterelease the pressing and pedal
pe iletrit h tachometer’s the into enter will speed ehdo uhn ntebrake the on pushing of method
o h eryuaei,teengine the in, are you gear the for ee u fPr ftenormal the if Park of out lever
fyuece h aiu speed maximum the exceed you If hsalw o omv h shift the move to you allows This
COVER hf okRelease Lock Shift Limiter Speed Engine
uoai Transmission Automatic ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４０：０３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２５２ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４０：０９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２５３
Automatic Transmission
6. Remove the key from the Shift Lock Release slot, then reinstall thecover.Makesurethenotchon the cover is on the left side. Return the key to the ignition switch, depress the brake pedal and restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock release, it means your vehicle is developing a problem. Have the SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT vehicle checked by your dealer. 4. Insert the key in the shift lock release slot.
5. Push down on the key while you move the shift lever out of Park to neutral.
250 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４０：１８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２５４
Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the moonroof and the the front wheels away from the the parking brake is set firmly, or windows are closed. curb. If your vehicle has a manual your vehicle may roll if it is parked transmission, put it in first gear. on an incline. Turn off the lights. If the vehicle is facing downhill, If your vehicle has an automatic Place any packages, valuables, etc., turn the front wheels toward the transmission, set the parking brake in the trunk or take them with you. curb. If your vehicle has a manual before you put the transmission in transmission, put it in reverse gear. Park. This keeps the vehicle from Lockthedoorswiththekeyorthe moving and putting pressure on the remote transmitter. Make sure the parking brake is parking mechanism in the Check the indicator on the fully released before driving away. Driving transmission. instrument panel to verify that the Driving with the parking brake security system is set. partially set can overheat or If your vehicle has a manual damage the rear brakes. transmission, put it in first gear. Never park over dry leaves, tall grass, or other flammable materials. The hot three way catalytic converter could cause these materials to catch on fire.
251 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４０：２４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２５５
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc Check the brakes after driving Brake Wear Indicators brakes at all four wheels. A power through deep water. Apply the All four brakes have audible brake assist helps reduce the effort needed brakes moderately to see if they feel wear indicators. on the brake pedal. The anti-lock normal. If not, apply them gently and brake system (ABS) helps you retain frequently until they do. Be extra If the brake pads need replacing, you steering control when braking very cautious in your driving. will hear a distinctive, metallic hard. screeching sound when you apply Braking System Design the brake pedal. If you do not have Resting your foot on the pedal keeps The hydraulic system that operates the brake pads replaced, they will the brakes applied lightly, builds up the brakes has two separate circuits. screech all the time. It is normal for heat, increases wear, and reduces Each circuit works diagonally across the brakes to occasionally squeal or their effectiveness. It also keeps the vehicle (the left-front brake is squeak when you apply them. your brake lights on all the time, connected with the right-rear brake, confusing drivers behind you. etc.). If one circuit should develop a problem, you will still have braking Constant application of the brakes at two wheels. when going down a long hill builds up heat and reduces their effective- ness. Use the engine to assist the brakes by taking your foot off the accelerator and downshifting to a lower gear.
252
253
CONTINUED
down.
itiuinsse a lob shut be also may system distribution
eesd h rn-ora braking front-to-rear the released,
eerdt s‘sopadsteer.’’ and ‘‘stomp as to referred n h akn rk sfully is brake parking the and
h aad hsi sometimes is This hazard. the ytmidctrcm ntogether, on come indicator system
rk ea syuseraa from away steer you as pedal brake fteASidctradtebrake the and indicator ABS the If
epn im taypesr nthe on pressure steady firm, keeping
e h B okfryub always by you for work ABS the Let nomto display. information
hsdfasteproeo h ABS. the of purpose the defeats this YTM’msaei h multi- the in message SYSTEM’’
o ilas e ‘HC ABS ‘‘CHECK a see also will you o hudnvrpm h rk pedal; brake the pump never should You
Driving
hnteASidctrcmson, comes indicator ABS the When
o r rigt tpo nwo ice. or snow on stop to trying are you ovhceloading. vehicle to
elteASatvt meitl if immediately activate ABS the feel erbaigdsrbto according distribution braking rear ona possible. as soon
B ciae.Hwvr o may you However, activates. ABS h B loblne h front-to- the balances also ABS The ordae npc orvhceas vehicle your inspect dealer your
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe ihu nilc.Yusol have should You anti-lock. without
aeet o ilne opeson press to need will you pavement, esncnd it. do can person ieacnetoa ytm but system, conventional a like
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry rksrpdy uhfse hna than faster much rapidly, brakes a htdw.Tebae tl work still brakes The down. shut has
oml ti h B rapidly ABS the is it normal: teigcnrlb upn the pumping by control steering okfnto ftebaigsystem braking the of function lock
o a ersm os.Ti is This noise. some hear may you okn p n ep o retain you helps and up, locking fti niao oe n h anti- the on, comes indicator this If
ea hnteASatvts and activates, ABS the when pedal ep rvn h rksfrom brakes the prevent helps
o ilfe usto ntebrake the in pulsation a feel will You h nilc rk ytm(ABS) system brake anti-lock The B Indicator ABS
nilc rks(ABS) Brakes Anti-lock ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４０：３２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２５６ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４０：３９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２５７
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Test your brakes as instructed on Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a page326 . If the brakes feel normal, ABS does not reduce the time or longer distance to stop on loose or drive slowly and have your vehicle distance it takes to stop the uneven surfaces, such as gravel or repaired by your dealer as soon as vehicle. It only helps with the snow, than a vehicle without anti- possible. Avoid sudden hard braking steering control during braking. lock. Slow down, and allow a greater which could cause the rear wheels to distance between vehicles under lock up and possibly lead to a loss of ABS will not prevent a skid that those conditions. control. results from changing direction abruptly, such as trying to take a The VSA indicator will come on corner too fast or making a sudden alongwiththeABSindicator. lane change. Always drive at a safe speed for the road and weather conditions.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of stability. Always steer moderately when you are braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road.
254 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４０：４８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２５８
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) VSA Activation Indicator If the indicator does not come on system helps to stabilize the vehicle when the ignition switch is turned to during cornering if the vehicle turns When VSA activates, you will see the the ON (II) position, there may be a more or less than desired. It also VSA activation indicator blink. problem with the VSA system. Have assists you in maintaining traction your dealer inspect your vehicle as while accelerating on loose or VSA System Indicator soon as possible. slippery road surfaces. It does this by regulating the engine’s output, If this indicator comes on while When the VSA system indicator and by selectively applying the driving, pull to the side of the road comes on, you will also see a brakes. when it is safe, and turn off the ‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ message in engine. Reset the system by the multi-information display. When VSA activates, you may notice restarting the engine. If the VSA Driving that the engine does not respond to system indicator stays on, or comes Without VSA, your vehicle will have the accelerator in the same way it back on while driving, have the VSA normal braking and cornering ability, does at other times. system inspected by your dealer. but it will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement. The VSA system cannot enhance the vehicle’s driving stability in all situations and does not control your vehicle’s entire braking system. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.
CONTINUED
255 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４０：５６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２５９
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the VSA to malfunction. When replacing tires, makesuretheyareofthesamesize and type as your original tires (see page307 ).
Deactivate the VSA system if you need to drive with the compact spare tire installed (see page312 ).
If you install winter tires, make sure they are the same size as those that This switch is under the left vent. were originally supplied with your Press it to turn the vehicle stability vehicle. Exercise the same caution assist system on and off. during winter driving as you would if your vehicle was not equipped with When VSA is off, the VSA activation VSA. indicator comes on as a reminder.
VSA is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.
256 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４１：０６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２６０
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed to Load Limits primarily carry passengers and their cargo. You can also use it to tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the guidelines in this section.
Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle Driving and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Total Trailer Weight:The Tongue Load: The weight that maximum allowable weight of the the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer Check the loading of your trailer and everything in or on it puts on the hitch should be vehicle and trailer carefully must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). approximately 10 % of the total beforestartingtodrive. Towing a load that is too heavy trailer weight. Too much tongue can seriously affect your vehicle’s load reduces front-tire traction and handling and performance. It can steering control. Too little tongue also damage the engine and load can make the trailer unstable drivetrain. and cause it to sway.
CONTINUED
257 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４１：１２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２６１
Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load, Gross Axle Weight Rating Checking Loads start by loading 60 % of the load (GAWR): The best way to confirm that vehicle toward the front of the trailer and The maximum allowable weight of and trailer weights are within limits 40 % toward the rear, then re-adjust the vehicle axles is: is to have them checked at a public the load as needed. scale. 2,335 Ibs (1,060 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating on the front axle Using a suitable scale or a special (GVWR): 2,030 Ibs (920 kg) tongue load gauge, check the tongue The maximum allowable weight of on the rear axle load the first time you set up a the vehicle, all occupants, all towing combination (a fully-loaded accessories, all cargo, and the vehicle and trailer), then recheck the tongue load is: tongue load whenever the conditions change. 4,300 Ibs (1,950 kg)
258 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４１：２１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２６２
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and Hitches Trailer Brakes Accessories Any hitch used on your vehicle must Acura recommends that any trailer Towing generally requires a variety be properly bolted to the underbody. having a total weight of 1,000 lbs of supplemental equipment, (450 kg) or more be equipped with depending on the size of your trailer, Safety Chains its own electric or surge-type brakes. how much load you are towing, and Always use safety chains when you where you tow. To ensure the best tow a trailer. Make sure the chains If you choose electric brakes, be quality, we recommend that you are secured to the trailer and hitch, sure they are electrically actuated. purchase Acura equipment and that they cross under the tongue Do not attempt to tap into your whenever possible. and can catch the trailer if it vehicle’s hydraulic system. No becomes unhitched. Leave enough matter how successful it may seem, Discuss your needs with your trailer slack to allow the trailer to turn any attempt to attach trailer brakes Driving sales or rental agency, and follow the corners easily, but do not let the to your vehicle’s hydraulic system guidelines in the rest of this section. chains drag on the ground. will lower braking effectiveness and Also make sure that all equipment is create a potential hazard. properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, See your trailer dealer for more province, and local regulations. information on installing electric brakes.
CONTINUED
259 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４１：２７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２６３
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights Additional Towing Equipment Ask your trailer sales or rental Trailer lights and equipment must Many states and Canadian provinces agency if any other items are comply with federal, state, province, require special outside mirrors when recommended or required for your and local regulations. Check the towing a trailer. Even if they don’t, towing situation. requirements for the areas where you should install special mirrors if you plan to tow, and use only you cannot clearly see behind you, or equipment designed for your vehicle. if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Since lighting and wiring vary by trailer type and brand, you should have a qualified technician install a suitable connector between the vehicle and the trailer. Improper equipment or installation can cause damage to your vehicle’s electrical system and affect your vehicle warranty.
260 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４１：３８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２６４
Towing a Trailer
Pre-Tow Checklist Your vehicle tires and spare are Backing Up When preparing to tow, and before properly inflated (see page304 ), Always drive slowly and have driving away, be sure to check the and the trailer tires and spare are someone guide you when backing up. following: inflated as recommended by the Grip thebottom of the steering trailer maker. wheel; then turn the wheel to the left The vehicle has been properly to get the trailer to move to the left, serviced, and the tires, brakes, Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting andturnthewheelrighttomovethe suspension, cooling system, and Crosswinds and air turbulence trailer to the right. lights are in good operating caused by passing trucks can disrupt condition. your steering and cause trailer to Parking sway. When being passed by a large Follow all normal precautions when All weights and loads are within vehicle, keep a constant speed, and parking, including firmly setting the Driving limits (see pages258 and 259 ). steer straight ahead. Do not try to parking brake and putting the make quick steering or braking transmission in Park (automatic) or Thehitch,safetychains,andany corrections. in first or reverse (manual). Also, other attachments are secure. place wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s tires. All items in or on the trailer are properly secured and cannot shift while you drive.
The lights and brakes on your vehicle and the trailer are working properly.
261 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４１：４８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２６５
Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer Making Turns and Braking If you must stop when facing uphill, The added weight, length, and Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider use the foot brake or parking brake. height of a trailer will affect your than normal. The trailer tracks a Do not try to hold the vehicle in vehicle’s handling and performance, smaller arc than your vehicle, and it place by pressing on the accelerator, so driving with a trailer requires canhitorrunoversomethingthe as this can cause the automatic some special driving skills and vehicle misses. Allow more time and transmission to overheat. techniques. distance for braking. Do not brake or turn suddenly as this could cause the When driving down hills, reduce Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof trailer to jackknife or turn over. your speed, and shift down to second others,taketimetopracticedriving gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and maneuvers before heading for the Driving on Hills remember, it will take longer to slow open road, and follow the guidelines When climbing hills, closely watch downandstopwhentowingatrailer. below. your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn the air Towing Speeds and Gears conditioning off, reduce speed and, if Drive slower than normal in all necessary, pull to the side of the driving situations, and obey posted road to let the engine cool. speed limits for vehicles with trailers. If you have an automatic If the automatic transmission shifts transmission, use D position when frequently while going up a hill, shift towing a trailer on level roads. D3 is to D3 . the proper shift lever position to use when towing a trailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘Driving on Hills ’’ in the next column for additional gear information.)
262 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４１：５４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２６６
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety...... 264 Tires...... 303 important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder...... 266 Inflation Guidelines...... 303 maintained and how to follow basic Maintenance Record...... 275 Recomended Tire Pressures... . 304 maintenance safety precautions. Fluid Locations...... 277 Tire Inspection...... 305 Adding Engine Oil...... 278 Tire Maintenance...... 305 This section also includes Recommended Engine Oil...... 278 Tire Rotation...... 306 instructions on how to read the Synthetic Oil...... 279 Replacing Tires and Wheels... . 306 maintenance messages in the multi- Engine Oil Additives...... 279 Wheel and Tire information display, a maintenance Changing the Oil and Filter...... 280 Specifications...... 307 record, and instructions for simple Windshield Washers...... 282 Winter Driving...... 307 maintenance tasks you may want to Engine Coolant...... 283 Snow Tires...... 307 take care of yourself. Adding Engine Coolant...... 283 Tire Chains...... 308 Transmission Fluid...... 285 Checking the Battery...... 309 If you have the skills and tools to Automatic Vehicle Storage...... 310 Maintenance perform more complex maintenance Transmission...... 285 tasks on your vehicle, you may want Manual to purchase the service manual. See Transmission...... 287 page353 for information on how to Brake and Clutch Fluid...... 288 obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Brake Fluid...... 288 Clutch Fluid...... 289 Power Steering Fluid...... 289 Lights...... 291 Seat Belts...... 299 Floor Mats...... 299 Dust and Pollen Filter...... 300 Wiper Blades...... 301
263 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４２：００ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２６７
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Make sure your vehicle is parked section should be performed by a on level ground, the parking brake certified technician or other qualified is set, and the engine is off. Improperly maintaining this mechanic. vehicle or failing to correct a To clean parts, use a commercially problem before driving can Important Safety Precautions available degreaser or parts cause a crash in which you can To eliminate potential hazards, read cleaner, not gasoline. be seriously hurt or killed. the instructions before you begin, and make sure you have the tools To reduce the possibility of fire or Always follow the inspection, and skills required. explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, maintenance recommendations, and flames away from the battery and schedules in this owner’s and all fuel-related parts. manual.
Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working near the battery or when using compressed air.
264 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４２：０６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２６８
Maintenance Safety
Potential Vehicle Hazards Carbon Monoxide poison from engine exhaust. Be sure Failure to properly follow there is adequate ventilation maintenance instructions and whenever you operate the precautions can cause you to engine. be seriously hurt or killed.
Burns from hot parts. Let the Always follow the procedures engine and exhaust system cool and precautions in this owner’s down before touching any parts. manual.
Injury from moving parts. Do not run the engine unless Some of the most important safety instructed to do so. precautions are given here. However, Maintenance we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task.
265 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４２：１６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２６９
Maintenance Minder
One of the most convenient and Engine Oil Life Display The remaining engine oil life is important features of the multi- displayed on the engine oil life information display on your vehicle ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY display according to this table: is the maintenance minder. Calculated Engine Displayed Based on engine operating Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life conditions and accumulated engine (%) revolutions, the onboard computer in 100%－ 91% 100% your vehicle calculates the remaining 90%－ 81% 90% engine oil life. 80%－ 71% 80% 70%－ 61% 70% The system also displays the code 60%－ 51% 60% for other scheduled maintenance REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE 50%－ 41% 50% items needing service. 40%－ 31% 40% To see the current engine oil life 30%－ 21% 30% displayed on the lower segment of 20%－ 16% 20% the multi-information display, turn 15%－ 11% 15% the ignition switch to the ON (II) 10%－ 6% 10% position, and press the SEL/RESET 5%－ 1% 5% buttononthesteeringwheel 0% 0% repeatedly until engine oil life is displayed.
266
267
CONTINUED
items.
aneac aniesadsub and items main maintenance
274 oes displayed. code(s) aefracmlt ito the of list complete a for page
oillifeandthemaintenanceitem thetimeoftheoilchange.Referto
ecnaeo h eann engine remaining the of percentage themainandsubitemsrequiredat
h oe emn.Yuwl e the see will You segment. lower the aneac tmcd()indicating code(s) item maintenance
nieollf ipa ilapa in appear will display life oil engine ON’msaeaogwt the with along message SOON’’
rsigteIF utn the button, INFO the pressing ipa hw ‘EVC DUE ‘‘SERVICE a shows display
nomto ipa scnee by canceled is display information 5t ,temulti-information the %, 6 to 15
fe h esg ntemulti- the in message the After hntermiigegn i ieis life oil engine remaining the When
Maintenance
ANEAC TMCD (S) CODE ITEM MAINTENANCE
U ITEMS SUB ITEM MAIN
performed.
osa nutlyuhv h service the have you until on stay to
h esg,teidctrcontinues indicator the message, the
o rs h NObto ocancel to button INFO the press you
75 oe n(e ae) vnafter Even ). page (see on comes
ytmmsaeidctralso indicator message system
hntemsaeapas the appears, message the When
NObto ntesern wheel. steering the on button INFO
ocne h esg,pesthe press message, the cancel To
aneac Minder Maintenance ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４２：２３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２７０ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４２：２９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２７１
Maintenance Minder
To cancel the engine oil life display, After have the service is performed, press the SEL/RESET button to make sure to reset the display as return to the previous display. described on page269 .
The message appears in the multi- To cancel the message, press the information display each time you INFO button on the steering wheel. turn the ignition switch to the ON Toseethemessageagain,waitfor (II) position. After canceling the an interval for more than 5 seconds, message, the engine oil life display and then press the INFO button. will appear in the lower segment. This continues until you have the indicated maintenance done by your dealer.
When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1%, the multi-information display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ message. The display also shows the same maintenance items that were previously shown with ‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON.’’ Make sure you have the indicated maintenance performed as soon as possible.
268
269
EE button. RESET eunt h rvosdisplay. previous the to return CONTINUED
ipa,adpesteSEL/ the press and display, rs h E/EE utnto button SEL/RESET the press
he oslc ‘EE’ nthe on ‘‘RESET’’ select to wheel ocne h nieollf display, life oil engine the cancel To
oes displayed. code(s) h NObto ntesteering the on button INFO the
eetdyutli oe back. comes it until repeatedly i ieadtemitnneitem maintenance the and life oil orstteegn i ie press life, oil engine the reset To
buttononthesteeringwheel ecnaeo h eann engine remaining the of percentage
ipae,pesteSEL/RESET the press displayed, ‘EVC’ esg ln ihthe with along message ‘‘SERVICE’’ nomto display. information
2. fteegn i iedslyi not is display life oil engine the If h oe emn.Yuwl e a see will You segment. lower the modewillbeshownonthemulti-
nieollf ipa ilapa in appear will display life oil engine eann nieollf reset life oil engine remaining
rsigteIF utn the button, INFO the pressing oeta 0scns The seconds. 10 than more I)position. (II)
1. nomto ipa scnee by canceled is display information utno h teigwelfor wheel steering the on button unteinto wtht h ON the to switch ignition the Turn
3. fe h esg ntemulti- the in message the After rs n odteSEL/RESET the hold and Press
follows:
Maintenance
ee h aneac idras minder maintenance the reset
oen te hnyu dealer, your than other someone
fmitnnesriei oeby done is service maintenance If
I)position. (II)
unteinto wtht h ON the to switch ignition the turn
oes rsdtenx ieyou time next the erased code(s)
ipa n h aneac item maintenance the and display
emn ftemulti-information the of segment
‘I IE10%’i h lower the in %’’ 100 LIFE ‘‘OIL
aneac evc.Yuwl see will You service. maintenance ‘EVC’ MESSAGE ‘‘SERVICE’’
fe opeigterequired the completing after
ordae ilrsttedisplay the reset will dealer Your
aneac Minder Maintenance ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４２：３８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２７２ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４２：４４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２７３
Maintenance Minder
To cancel resetting the oil life, Immediately have the service presstheINFObuttononthe performed, and make sure to reset steering wheel to select the display as previously described. ‘‘CANCEL’’ on the display, and press the SEL/RESET button. To cancel the message, press the INFO button on the steering wheel. If you do not complete the reset Toseethemessageagain,waitfor procedure within 30 seconds after an interval for more than 5 seconds, selecting the reset mode, the mode and then press the INFO button. will be canceled automatically.
If you have the required service performed but do not reset the display, or reset the display without performing the service, the system If the indicated maintenance service will not show the proper is not done and the remaining engine maintenance intervals. This can lead oil life reaches 0 %, the multi- to serious mechanical problems information display will show the because you will no longer have an message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ accurate record of when and the maintenance item code(s). maintenance is needed. This message is displayed when the total mileage after the engine oil life became 0 % is less than 10 miles (for U.S. models)/10 km (for Canadian models).
270
271
CONTINUED
aneac tmcd()displayed. code(s) item maintenance aneac tmcode(s). item maintenance
ecnae‘0’ n the and ‘‘0%’’ percentage oillifebecame0%,andthe
‘EVC’ esg ln ihthe with along message ‘‘SERVICE’’ thetotalmileageaftertheremaining
h oe emn.Yuwl e a see will You segment. lower the ‘EVC ATDE’message, DUE’’ PAST ‘‘SERVICE
nieollf ipa ilapa in appear will display life oil engine nomto ipa ilso a show will display information
rsigteIF utn the button, INFO the pressing i iebcms0% h multi- the %, 0 becomes life oil
nomto ipa scnee by canceled is display information o oeadtermiigengine remaining the and done not
fe h esg ntemulti- the in message the After fteidctdrqie evc is service required indicated the If
Maintenance
eunt h rvosdisplay. previous the to return
rs h E/EE utnto button SEL/RESET the press
ocne h nieollf display, life oil engine the cancel To
aainmodels). Canadian
frUS oes/0k (for km models)/10 U.S. (for
iebcm sls hn1 miles 10 than less is % 0 became life
whenthemileageaftertheengineoil
hspriua esg sdisplayed is message particular This
CANADA U.S.
lnigo h display. the on blinking
lo h ecnae‘0%’keeps %’’ ‘‘0 percentage the Also,
aneac Minder Maintenance ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４２：５３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２７４ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４３：０１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２７５
Maintenance Minder
This message is displayed when you Also, the total negative mileage drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models) keeps blinking on the display. or 10 km (for Canadian models) after seeing the 0 % message. U.S. This particular message is displayed when you drive over 10 miles (for Immediately have the service U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian performed, and make sure to reset models) after seeing the 0 % the display as previously described. CANADA message. The maximum total mileage shown The maximum total negative mileage with this message is ‘‘9999 mile’’ (for is ‘‘－ 9999 mile’’ (for U.S. models) or U.S. models) or ‘‘9999 km’’ (for ‘‘－ 9999 km’’ (for Canadian models). Canadian models). To cancel the engine oil life display, To cancel the message, press the After the message in the multi- press the SEL/RESET button to INFO button on the steering wheel. information display is canceled by return to the previous display. To see the message again, wait for pressing the INFO button, the an interval of more than 5 seconds, engine oil life display will appear in and then press the INFO button. the lower segment. You will see a ‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the maintenance item code(s), and the total negative mileage after the oil life becomes 0 % is displayed.
272 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４３：１３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２７６
Maintenance Schedule
Important Maintenance U.S. Vehicles: Engine oil level－ Check every Precautions Maintenance, replacement, or time you fill the fuel tank. See Your authorized dealer knows your repair of emissions control page232 . vehicle best and can provide devices and systems may be done competent, efficient service. by any automotive repair Engine coolant level－ Check the However, service at a dealer is not establishment or individual using radiator reserve tank every time mandatory to keep your warranties parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA you fill the fuel tank. See page232 . in effect. Maintenance may be done standards. by any qualified service facility or Automatic transmission－ Check person who is skilled in this type of According to state and federal the fluid level monthly. See pages automotive service. Keep all receipts regulations, failure to perform 285－ 286 . as proof of completion, and have the maintenance on the items marked person who does the work fill out the with＃ will not void your emissions Brakes－ Check the fluid level maintenance record. Check your warranties. However, all monthly. See page288 . Maintenance warranty booklet for more maintenance services should be information. performed at the recommended time Tires－ Check the tire pressure or mileage period to ensure long- monthly. Examine the tread for We recommend the use of Acura term reliability. wear and foreign objects. See page parts and fluids whenever you have 303 . maintenance done. These are Owner’s Maintenance Checks manufactured to the same high- Youshouldcheckthefollowing Lights－ Check the operation of quality standards as the original items at the specified intervals. If the headlights, parking lights, components, so you can be confident you are unsure of how to perform taillights, high-mount brake light, of their performance and durability. any check, turn to the appropriate and license plate lights monthly. page listed.
273 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４３：２０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２７７
Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items A Replace engine oil＊1 1 Rotate tires B Replace engine oil＊1 and oil filter 2 Replace air cleaner element Inspect front and rear brakes If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 Check parking brake adjustment miles (24,000 km). Inspect these items: Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots Replace dust and pollen filter Suspension components If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high Driveshaft boots concentrations of soot in the air from industry and Brake hoses and line (including ABS) from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 All fluid levels and condition of fluids miles (24,000 km). Exhaust system＃ Fuel lines and connections＃ Inspect drive belt 3 Replace transmission fluid ＊1: If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year. speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission and transfer temperatures. This ＃ : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the center requires transmission and transfer fluid changes column on page273 . more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder maintenance minder. If you regularly drive your NOTE: Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-information vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years. and transfer fluid changed at 60,000 miles (100,000 Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). (For A/T Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy. only.) 4 Replace spark plugs Inspect valve clearance 5 Replace engine coolant
274
275
CONTINUED
km km
mi mi AB123456 AB123456
km km
mi mi AB123456 AB123456
km km
mi mi AB123456 AB123456
km km
mi mi AB123456 AB123456
Maintenance km km
mi mi AB123456 AB123456
km km
mi mi AB123456 AB123456
km km
mi mi AB123456 AB123456
Date Date
Performed Performed
Mileage Mileage Signature Signature Maintenance Maintenance
vehicle.
opee,adwiei n te o-oe tm sc sbaefudrpaeet eo h oe.Ke h eepsfralwr oeo your on done work all for receipts the Keep codes. the below replacement) fluid brake as (such items non-coded other any in write and completed,
o rtesriigdae a eodalcmltdmitnnehr.We aneac spromd eodtemlae icetecdditem(s) coded the circle mileage, the record performed, is maintenance When here. maintenance completed all record can dealer servicing the or You
aneac Record Maintenance ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４３：２９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２７８ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４３：３５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２７９
Maintenance Record
Mileage Maintenance Signature Mileage Maintenance Signature Performed Performed Date Date
mi AB123456 mi AB123456 km km
mi AB123456 mi AB123456 km km
mi AB123456 mi AB123456 km km
mi AB123456 mi AB123456 km km
mi AB123456 mi AB123456 km km
mi AB123456 mi AB123456 km km
mi AB123456 mi AB123456 km km
276 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４３：３９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２８０
Fluid Locations
BRAKE FLUID CLUTCH FLUID (Black cap) (Manual Transmission only) (Light gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK ENGINE OIL (Orange handle) FILL CAP
WASHER FLUID AUTOMATIC Maintenance (Blue cap) TRANSMISSION FLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop)
POWER STEERING ENGINE COOLANT FLUID (Red cap) RESERVE TANK
RADIATOR CAP
277 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４３：４４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２８１
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and Recommended Engine Oil tighten it securely. Wait a few Oil is a major contributor to your minutes, and recheck the oil level on engine’s performance and longevity. the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill Always use a premium-grade above the upper mark; you could detergent oil displaying the API damage the engine. Certification Seal. This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute’s latest requirements. It is highly recommended that you use Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for as long as you own it.
Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap on top of the valve cover. Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately. Spilled oil could damage components in the engine compartment.
278 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４３：５２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２８２
Adding Engine Oil
Synthetic Oil You may use a synthetic motor oil if it meets the same requirements given for a conventional motor oil: it displays the API Certification Seal and it is the proper weight. You must follow the oil and filter change intervals shown on the multi- information display.
Ambient Temperature Engine Oil Additives API CERTIFICATION SEAL Your vehicle does not require any oil additives. Additives may adversely Make sure the API Certification Seal An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 is affect the engine or transmission Maintenance says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’ preferred for improved fuel economy performance and durability. and year-round protection in your vehicle. You may use a 10W-30 oil if the temperature in your area never goes below 20°F (－ 7°C).
279 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４４：０２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２８３
Changing the Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter OIL DRAIN BOLT according to the maintenance messages shown on the multi- information display. The oil and filter collect contaminants that can damage your engine if they are not removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires special tools and access from BOLT underneath the vehicle. The vehicle WASHER should be raised on a service station- MAINTENANCE COVER type hydraulic lift for this service. Unless you have the knowledge and 1. Run the engine until it reaches 4. Remove the oil drain bolt and proper equipment, you should have normal operating temperature, washer from the bottom of the this maintenance done by a skilled then shut it off. engine. Drain the oil into an mechanic. appropriate container. 2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap. 5. Remove the oil filter and let the remaining oil drain. A special 3. Remove the bolt located on the wrench (available from your underside of the body with a dealer) is required. wrench, then remove the maintenance cover.
280 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４４：１３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２８４
Changing the Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER 7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, 11.Turn off the engine, let it sit for then reinstall the drain bolt. several minutes, then check the oil Tighten it to: level on the dipstick. If necessary, 33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m) add more oil.
8. Refill the engine with the recom- 12.Install the maintenance cover and mended oil. tighten the bolt securely.
Engine oil change capacity (including filter): 4.4 US qt (4.2 ) Improper disposal of engine oil can be harmf ul to the environment. If you 9. Replace the engine oil fill cap. change your own oil, please dispose of Make sure the oil filter gasket is Start the engine. The oil pressure the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed Maintenance not stuck to the engine block. If it indicator should go out within 5 container and take it to a recycling is, remove it before installing a seconds. If it does not, turn off the center. Do not discard it in a trash bin new oil filter. engine, and check your work. or dump it on the ground.
6. Install a new oil filter according to 10.Let the engine run for several the instructions that come with it. minutes, then check the drain bolt Make sure to clean off any dirt and oil filter for leaks. and dust on the connecting surface of a new oil filter.
281 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４４：２０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２８５
Windshield Washers
Check the level in the windshield LEVEL GAUGE washer reservoir at least monthly during normal use. Do not use engine antif reeze or a vinegar/water solution in the Check the reservoir’s fluid level by windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze removing the cap and looking at the can damage your vehicle’s paint, while level gauge attached to the cap. a vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Use only Canadian models only commercially-available windshield If the washer fluid is low, a washer f luid. ‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ message appears in the multi-information display. When you refill the reservoir, clean Fill the reservoir with a good-quality the edges of the windshield wiper windshield washer fluid. This blades with windshield washer fluid increases the cleaning capability and on a clean cloth. This will help to prevents freezing in cold weather. condition the blade edges.
282 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４４：２７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２８６
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major-brand non-silicate coolant as a Removing the radiator cap temporaryreplacement.Makesureit while the engine is hot can is a high-quality coolant cause the coolant to spray out, recommended for aluminum engines. seriously scalding you. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, Always let the engine and causing the cooling system to radiator cool down before malfunction or fail. Have the cooling removing the radiator cap. system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as RESERVE TANK possible. Maintenance If the coolant level in the reserve If the reserve tank is completely tank is at or below the MIN line, add empty, you should also check the coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. coolant level in the radiator. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. Always use Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant is pre-mixed with 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Never add straight antifreeze or plain water.
CONTINUED
283 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４４：３８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２８７
Engine Coolant
4. The coolant level should be up to 6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank. the base of the filler neck. Add Fill it to halfway between the MAX RADIATOR CAP coolant if it is low. and MIN marks. Put the cap back on the reserve tank. Pourthecoolantslowlyand carefully so you do not spill any. Do not add any rust inhibitors or Clean up any spill immediately; it other additives to your vehicle’s could damage components in the cooling system. They may not be engine compartment. compatible with the coolant or engine components. 5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling system by turning the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pressing down.
3. Remove the radiator cap by pushing down and turning counterclockwise.
284
285
CONTINUED
ihacencloth. clean a with
l h way. the all rmtetasiso,adwp it wipe and transmission, the from
2. n htyups h isikin dipstick the push you that and eoetedptc ylo loop) (yellow dipstick the Remove
isikft ntedptc guide dipstick the in fits dipstick
aesr h ubrcpo the on cap rubber the sure Make htofteengine. the off Shut
1. aktevhceo ee ground. level on vehicle the Park
hw nteillustration. the in shown
notetasiso eueyas securely transmission the into tnra prtn temperature. operating normal at
3. nettedptc l h a back way the all dipstick the Insert hc h li ee ihteengine the with level fluid the Check compartment.
Maintenance
DIPSTICK aaecmoet nteengine the in components damage
OE MARK LOWER
n pl meitl;i could it immediately; spill any
PE MARK UPPER
oyud o pl n.Cenup Clean any. spill not do you so
ortefudsol n carefully and slowly fluid the Pour
uet rn tt h pe mark. upper the to it bring to tube
ak d li notedipstick the into fluid add mark,
5. ftelvli eo h lower the below is level the If
marks.
ewe h pe n lower and upper the between
h li ee.I hudbe should It level. fluid the
4. eoetedptc n check and dipstick the Remove Transmission Automatic
rnmsinFluid Transmission ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４４：４８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２８８ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４４：５４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２８９
Transmission Fluid
Always use Honda ATF-Z1 To thoroughly flush the transmission, 6. Insert the dipstick all the way back (automatic transmission fluid). If it’s the technician should drain and refill into the transmission securely as not available, you may use a it with Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic shown in the illustration. DEXRON III automatic Transmission Fluid), then drive the transmission fluid as a temporary vehicle for a short distance. Do this The transmission should be drained replacement. However, continued three times. Then drain and refill the andrefilledwithnewfluidwhenthis use can affect the shift quality. Have transmission a final time. serviceisshownonamaintenance the transmission flushed and refilled message in the multi-information with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is display. convenient. Ifyouarenotsurehowtoaddfluid, contact your dealer.
286 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４５：０２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２９０
Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Clean up any spills immediately. Spilled fluid could damage BOLT FILLER BOLT components in the engine compartment.
After checking and adding the fluid, put the under cover back in place and tighten the bolts securely.
If Honda MTF is not available, you may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 viscosity motor oil with the API BOLT UNDER COVER Correct level Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a Maintenance To check the transmission fluid level, Check the fluid level with the temporary replacement. However, remove the two bolts, then pull the transmission at normal operating motor oil does not contain the proper left part of the under cover down. temperature and the vehicle sitting additives, and continued use can on level ground. Remove the cause stiffer shifting. Replace as If you are not sure how to add fluid, transmission filler bolt, and carefully soon as it is convenient. contact your dealer. feel inside the bolt hole with your finger. The fluid level should be up The transmission should be drained to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is andrefilledwithnewfluidwhenthis not, add Honda Manual serviceisshownonamaintenance Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it message in the multi-information starts to run out of the hole. Reinstall display. the filler bolt, and tighten it securely.
287 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４５：１０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２９１
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check the fluid level in the Always use Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid reservoirs monthly. There are up to Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not two reservoirs, depending on the available, you should use only DOT 3 model. They are: or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed container, as a temporary Brake fluid reservoir (all models) replacement. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission models Using any non-Honda brake fluid can only) cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Have the brake Replace the brake fluid when this system flushed and refilled with service is indicated on a maintenance Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid message in the multi-information DOT 3 as soon as possible. MAX MIN display. Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not The fluid level should be between compatible with your vehicle’s theMINandMAXmarksontheside braking system and can cause of the reservoir. If the level is at or extensive damage. below the MIN mark, your brake system needs attention. Have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads.
288 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４５：１９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２９２
Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Clutch Fluid Power Steering Fluid Pour the fluid slowly and carefully Manual Transmission only so you do not spill any. Clean up UPPER LEVEL any spill immediately; it could MAX damage components in the engine compartment.
LOWER LEVEL MIN Maintenance Check the level on the side of the The fluid level should be between reservoir when the engine is cold. theMINandMAXmarksontheside The fluid should be between the of the reservoir. If it is not, add UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL. brake fluid to bring it up to that level. If not, add power steering fluid to the Use the same fluid specified for the UPPER LEVEL. brake system.
A low fluid level can indicate a leak in the clutch system. Have this system inspected as soon as possible. CONTINUED
289 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４５：２３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２９３
Power Steering Fluid
Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. You may use another power steering fluid as an emergency replacement, but have the power steering system flushed and refilled with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can indicate a leak in the system. Check the fluid level frequently, and have the system inspected as soon as possible.
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t or right lock and holding it there can damage the power steering pump.
290 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４５：２９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２９４
Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a High Beam Headlight NOTE: Halogen headlight bulbs get Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed Bulb very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a when your vehicle was new. If you Your vehicle has halogen headlight scratch on the glass can cause the bulb regularly carry heavy items in the bulbs, one on each side. When to overheat and shatter. trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment replacing a bulb, handle it by its steel may be required. Adjustments base and protect the glass from should be performed by your dealer contactwithyourskinorhard or other qualified mechanic. objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean Low Beam Headlight Bulb cloth. Replacement The low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the Maintenance circuit even with the light switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to examine or change a low beam headlight bulb yourself. If a low beam headlight bulb fails, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it replaced.
CONTINUED
291 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４５：３８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２９５
Lights
FASTENER AIR INTAKE COVER BULB RUBBER WEATHER SEAL 4. Unclip the end of the hold-down wire from its slot. Pivot it out of SOCKET the way, and remove the bulb socket.
5. Pull the burned out bulb straight out of its socket. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms.
6. Insert the socket back into the HOLD-DOWN WIRE CONNECTOR headlight assembly. Make sure the bulb is installed correctly by 1.Open the hood. To change a bulb 2. Remove the electrical connector looking through the headlight lens. on the driver’s side, undo the from the bulb by pulling the Pivot the hold-down wire back in three fasteners and remove the air connector straight back. place, and clip the end into the slot. intake cover. 3. Remove the rubber weather seal 7. Install the rubber weather seal by pulling on the tab. over the back of the headlight assembly.Makesureitisright side up; it is marked with an arrow.
292 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４５：４９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２９６
Lights
8. Push the electrical connector onto Replacing the Turn Signal Light 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its the socket. Make sure it is Bulb socket. Push the new bulb straight connected securely. into the socket until it bottoms. BULB 9. Turn on the headlights to test the 4. Insert the socket back into the new bulb. headlight assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place. 10.On the driver’s side, reinstall the air intake cover. Reinstall the 5. Turn on the lights to test the new three fasteners and secure them bulb. by pushing on the heads until they lock.
SOCKET Maintenance
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
293 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４５：５６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２９７
Lights
Replacing a Front Side Marker/ HOLDING CLIPS FrontParkingLightBulb 1. To change the bulb on the driver’s side, start the engine, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, and turn off the engine. To change the bulb on the passenger’s side, turn the steering wheel to the left.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to 5. Pull the bulb straight out of its remove the two holding clips from socket. Push the new bulb straight the inner fender. into the socket until it bottoms.
3. Pull the inner fender cover away from the fender and bumper.
4. Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
294 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４６：０７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２９８
Lights
6. Insert the socket back into the Replacing Rear Bulbs headlight assembly. Turn it (In Fenders) clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Turn on the lights to test the new bulb.
8. Put the inner fender cover in place. Install and lock each holding clip bypushingonthecenter.
COVER Maintenance
1. Open the trunk. 4. Push a new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms, and 2. Remove the light assembly cover reinstall the socket into the light by pulling its outside edge. assembly by turning it clockwise until it locks. 3. Remove the socket by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise, 5. Test the new bulb to make sure it and pull the bulb straight out of its works. socket. 6. Reinstall the light assembly cover.
295 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４６：２０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０２９９
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs 7. Insert the socket back into the (in Trunk Lid) light assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place. BULBS 8. Turn on the lights to test the new bulb.
9. Reinstall the trunk lid trim. Make sure it is installed under the edge of the trunk lid seal.
10.Press the trim clips back into their holes. TRIM CLIPS SOCKETS 1. Open the trunk. 4. Determine which of the two bulbs is burned out: taillight or back-up 2. To replace a bulb on the right side, light. remove the trim clip. For the left side, remove the two trim clips.5. Remove the socket by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise. 3. Pull the lining back carefully. 6. Pull the bulb straight out of its socket. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms.
296 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４６：３４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３００
Lights
Replacing a High-mount Brake Side Turn Signal Light Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb Light Bulb Each outside mirror has side turn Your vehicle uses halogen light signal lights. The lights should be bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle replaced by your dealer. it by its plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or Rear License Plate Bulb hard objects. If you touch the glass, The license plate has two lights clean it with denatured alcohol and a above it. The bulbs should be clean cloth. replaced by your dealer.
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and Maintenance shatter. 1. Open the trunk, and remove the socket from the light assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counter- clockwise.
2. Remove the burned-out bulb by pulling it straight out of the socket.
3. Install the new bulb and reinstall the socket. Make sure the new bulb is working. CONTINUED
297 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４６：４３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３０１
Lights
5. Install the new bulb into the hole and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Push the electrical connector back onto the bulb. Make sure it is on all the way.
7. Turn on the fog lights to test the new bulb. BULB UNDERCOVER FIXING BOLT TAB 8. Put the undercover in place. Reinstall the fixing bolt and 1. Remove the undercover fixing bolt 3. Remove the electrical connector tighten it securely. located under the front bumper. from the bulb by pushing on the tab and pulling the connector 2. Push up the undercover. down.
4. Remove the bulb from the fog light assembly by turning it one- quarter turn counterclockwise.
298 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４６：５０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３０２
Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Seat BeltsDirt build-up in the loops of the seat Floor Mats belt anchors can cause the belts to retract slowly. Wipe the insides of Driver’s floor LOOP the loops with a clean cloth dampened in mild soap and warm water or isopropyl alcohol. Maintenance If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft The floor mats that came with your brush with a mixture of mild soap vehicle hook over floor mat anchors. and warm water to clean them. Do This keeps the floor mats from not use bleach, dye, or cleaning sliding forward/rearward and solvents. Let the belts air dry before possibly interfering with the pedals you use the vehicle. or making the front passenger’s weight sensor’s ineffective.
CONTINUED
299 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４６：５８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３０３
Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter
If you remove a floor mat, make sure Dust and Pollen Filter tore-anchoritwhenyouputitback This filter removes the dust and Rear passenger’s floor in your vehicle. pollenthatisbroughtinfromthe outside through the climate control If you use a non-Acura floor mat, system. make sure it fits properly and that it canbeusedwiththefloormat Have your dealer replace the filter anchor. Do not put additional floor when this service is indicated by a mats on top of the anchored mat. maintenance message in the multi- information display. It should be replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air, or if the flow from Make sure the rear floor mats are the heating and cooling system properly hooked to the floor mat becomeslessthanusual. anchors. Your vehicle is equipped with front passenger’s seat weight sensors. If the rear passenger’s floor mat is on the seat rail of the front passenger’s seat, the sensors will detect the decreased weight on the seat, and they may not work properly.
300 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４７：０７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３０４
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper BLADE ASSEMBLY blades at least every six months. WIPER BLADES Look for signs of cracking in the rubber, or areas that are getting hard. Replace the blades if you find these signs, or if they leave streaks and unwiped areas when used.
TAB
To replace a wiper blade:2. Disconnect the blade assembly Maintenance from the wiper arm: 1. Raise each wiper arm off the Press and hold the lock tab. windshield, lifting the driver’s side Slidethebladeassemblytoward first, then the passenger’s side. the lock tab until it releases from the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade, Do not open the hood when the wiper make sure not to drop the wiper arms are raised, or you will damage the blade or wiper arm down on the hood and wiper arms. windshield.
CONTINUED
301 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４７：１７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３０５
Wiper Blades
5. Install the new blade onto the BLADE blade assembly: Pull back either end of the blade assembly. Place the side of the blade not labeled‘‘LOCK’’ontheendof the blade assembly, and slide the blade onto the assembly until it is fully installed.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly WIPER BLADE REINFORCEMENT onto the wiper arm. Make sure it locks in place. 3.Remove the blade from the blade 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If assembly: they have no plastic or metal 7. Make sure the blade is completely Findthesideoftheblade reinforcement along the back installed and that its edge is not labeled ‘‘LOCK.’’ This is the side edge, remove the metal bunched up. you pull out. reinforcement strips from the old Pull back the end of the blade wiper blade, and install them in 8. Lower the wiper arm down against assembly on the ‘‘LOCK’’ side of the slots along the edge of the new the windshield, the passenger’s theblade.Thengrabtheendof blade. side first, then the driver’s side. the blade, and slide it out.
302 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４７：２７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３０６
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines Use a gauge to measure the air tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated pressure in each tire at least once a size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of month. Even tires that are in good tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to comfort. 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per The following pages give more month. Remember to check the detailed information on how to take Underinflated tires wear unevenly, sparetireatthesametime. care of your tires and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel when they need to be replaced.economy, and are more likely to Check the air pressures when the fail from being overheated. tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 Overinflated tires can make your hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 Using tires that are excessively vehicleridemoreharshly,are km). Add or release air, if needed, to worn or improperly inflated can more prone to damage from road match the recommended cold tire Maintenance cause a crash in which you can hazards, and wear unevenly. pressures on the next page. be seriously hurt or killed. We recommend that you visually Follow all instructions in this check your tires every day. If you owner’s manual regarding tire think a tire might be low, check it inflation and maintenance. immediately with a tire gauge.
CONTINUED
303 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４７：３６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３０７
Tires
If you check air pressures when the Recommended Tire Pressures Thecompactsparetirepressureis: tires are hot (driven for several The following chart shows the 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) miles), you will see readings 4 to 6 recommended cold tire pressures for psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) most normal driving conditions. For convenience, the recommended higher than the cold readings. This tire sizes and cold tire pressures are is normal. Do not let air out to match Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure on a label on the driver’s doorjamb. the recommended cold air pressure. for Normal Driving The tire will be underinflated. P215/50R17 93V Front: For additional information about 32 psi (220 kPa , your tires, see page340 . Youshoulduseyourowntire 2.2 kgf/cm ) pressure gauge and use it whenever Rear: you check your tire pressures. This 30 psi (210 kPa , will make it easier for you to tell if a 2.1 kgf/cm ) pressure loss is due to a tire problem and not due to a variation between gauges.
While tubeless tires have some ability to self-seal if they are punctured, you should look closely for punctures if a tire starts losing pressure.
304 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４７：４６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３０８
Tires
Tire Inspection Tire Maintenance Every time you check inflation, you INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS In addition to proper inflation, should also examine the tires for correct wheel alignment helps to damage, foreign objects, and wear. decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer Youshouldlookfor: check the wheel alignment.
Bumps or bulges in the tread or Have your dealer check the tires if side of the tire. Replace the tire if you feel a consistent vibration while youfindeitheroftheseconditions. driving. A tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side TREAD WEAR INDICATORS wheel. When you have new tires of the tire. Replace the tire if you installed, make sure they are can see fabric or cord. Your tires have wear indicators balanced. This increases riding Maintenance molded into the tread. When the comfort and tire life. For best results, Excessive tread wear. tread wears down, you will see a have the installer perform a dynamic band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide across balance. the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Improper wheel weights can damage A tire this worn gives very little your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use traction on wet roads. You should only genuine Acura wheels weights f or replace the tire if you can see three balancing. or more tread wear indicators.
305 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４７：５３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３０９
Tires
Tire RotationMove the tires to the positions Replacing Tires and Wheels shown in the illustration each time Replace your tires with radial tires of Front they are rotated. If you purchase the same size, load range, speed directional tires, rotate only front-to- rating, and maximum cold tire back. pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on your vehicle can reduce braking ability, traction, and steering accuracy. Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the (For non-directional (For directional tires and wheels) tires and wheels) ABS and vehicle stability assist system (VSA) to work inconsistently. To help increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly, rotate It is best to replace all four tires at the tires according to the thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible maintenance messages displayed in or necessary, replace the two front the multi-information display. Move tires or two rear tires as a pair. the tires to the positions shown in Replacing just one tire can seriously the chart each time they are rotated. affect your vehicle’s handling. If you purchase directional tires, rotate only front-to-back.
306 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４８：０４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３１０
Tires
If you ever replace a wheel, make Wheel and Tire Specifications Winter Driving sure that the wheel’s specifications Wheel: Tires marked ‘‘M＋ S’’ or ‘‘All match those of the original wheels. 17x7JJ Season’’ on the sidewall have an all- Replacement wheels are available at weather tread design suitable for your dealer. Tire: most winter driving conditions. P215/50R17 93V For the best performance in snowy See page341 for DOT tire quality or icy conditions, you should install Installing improper tires on your grading information, and page snow tires or tire chains. They may vehicle can affect handling and 340 for tire size information. be required by local laws under stability. This can cause a crash certain conditions. in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Snow Tires If you mount snow tires on your Maintenance Always use the size and type of vehicle, make sure they are radial tires recommended in this tires of the same size and load range owner’s manual. as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels. The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.
307 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４８：０９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３１１
Tires
Tire Chains When installing cables, follow the Mount tire chains on your tires when manufacturer’s instructions, and required by driving conditions or mount them as tight as you can. Using the wrong chains, or not local laws. Install them only on the Make sure they are not contacting properly installing chains, can front tires. the brake lines or suspension. Drive damage the brake lines and slowly with them installed. If you cause a crash in which you can Because your vehicle has limited tire hear them coming into contact with be seriously injured or killed. clearance, Acura strongly the body or chassis, stop and recommends using the chains listed investigate. Remove them as soon as Follow all instructions in this below, made by Security Chain you begin driving on cleared roads. owner’s manual regarding the Company (SCC). selection and use of tire chains.
CH2412T
308 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４８：１５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３１２
Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW Check the terminals for corrosion (a white or yellowish powder). To remove it, cover the terminals with a The battery gives off explosive solution of baking soda and water. It hydrogen gas during normal will bubble up and turn brown. When operation. this stops, wash it off with plain water. Dry off the battery with a A spark or flame can cause the cloth or paper towel. Coat the battery to explode with enough terminals with grease to help prevent force to kill or seriously hurt you. future corrosion. Wear protective clothing and a If additional battery maintenance is face shield, or have a skilled needed, see your dealer or a mechanic do the battery Check the condition of the battery qualified mechanic. maintenance. Maintenance monthlybylookingatthetest indicator window. The label on the WARNING: Battery posts, battery explains the test indicator’s terminals, and related accessories colors. contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.
If you need to connect the battery to a charger, disconnect both cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system. Always disconnect the negative (－ ) cable first, and reconnect it last.
309 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４８：２４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３１３
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for Block the rear wheels. Leave the parking brake off. Put an extended period (more than 1 the transmission in reverse month), there are several things you If the vehicle is to be stored for a (manual) or Park (automatic). should do to prepare it for storage. longer period, it should be Proper preparation helps prevent supported on jackstands so the Cover the vehicle with a deterioration and makes it easier to tires are off the ground. ‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made get your vehicle back on the road. If from a porous material such as possible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if cotton. Non-porous materials, such the vehicle is being stored as plastic sheeting, trap moisture, Fill the fuel tank. indoors). which can damage the paint.
Change the engine oil and filter. Disconnect the battery. If possible, periodically run the engine until it reaches full Wash and dry the exterior Support the front wiper blade operating temperature (the completely. arms with a folded towel or rag so cooling fan cycles twice). they do not touch the windshield. Preferably, do this once a month. Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe carpeting, floor mats, etc., are To minimize sticking, apply a completely dry. silicone spray lubricant to all door and trunk seals. Also, apply a vehiclebodywaxtothepainted surfaces that mate with the door and trunk seals.
310 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４８：２８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３１４
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire...... 312 common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire...... 313 experience with their vehicles. It If Your Engine Won’t Start...... 317 gives you information about how to Nothing Happens or the safely evaluate the problem and what Starter Motor Operates to do to correct it. If the problem has Very Slowly...... 317 stranded you on the side of the road, The Starter Operates you may be able to get going again. Normally...... 318 If not, you will also find instructions Jump Starting...... 319 on getting your vehicle towed. If Your Engine Overheats...... 321 Low Oil Pressure Indicator...... 323 Charging System Indicator...... 324 Malfunction Indicator Lamp...... 324 Readiness Codes...... 325 Brake System Indicator...... 326 Closing the Moonroof...... 327 Unexpected the of Care Taking Emergency Towing...... 328 Fuses...... 330 Checking and Replacing Fuses...... 330
311 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４８：４０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３１５
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a Do not mount snow chains on the INDICATOR LOCATION MARK temporary replacement only. Get compact spare tire. your regular tire repaired or replaced, and put it back on your vehicle as Do not use the compact spare tire soon as you can. if you are towing a trailer.
Check the inflation pressure of the Do not use your compact spare compact spare tire every time you tire on another vehicle unless it is check the other tires. It should be thesamemakeandmodel. inflated to: 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) Turn off the VSA system (see page256 ). Driving with the TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR Follow these precautions: compact spare tire may activate the VSA system. Replace the tire when you can see Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). the tread wear indicator bars. The On models with manual replacement should be the same size This tire gives a harsher ride and transmission, do not drive for a and design tire, mounted on the less traction on some road sur- long period with the compact samewheel.Thesparetireisnot faces. Use greater caution while spare tire mounted on a front designed to be mounted on a regular driving. wheel; it will damage the limited wheel, and the spare wheel is not slip differential. designed for mounting a regular tire.
312
313
CONTINUED
akn brake. parking
jack. rrvre(aul.Apythe Apply (manual). reverse or
hni sspotdol ythe by only supported is it when rnmsini ak(automatic) Park in transmission
Taking Care of the Unexpected
ee e ne h vehicle the under get never o-lpeygon.Ptthe Put ground. non-slippery
hnigatr xcl,and exactly, tire a changing 1. aktevhceo im ee and level firm, on vehicle the Park
olwtedrcin for directions the Follow
OLTA TOOLS TRAY TOOL JACK
noeunderneath. anyone
h ak eiul injuring seriously jack, the
h eil a aiyrl off roll easily can vehicle The
hl o hnetetire. the change you while a wyfo h rfi lanes. traffic the from away far
asnesgtoto h vehicle the of out get passengers o e oa xto nae htis that area an or exit an to get you
OK()psto.Hv all Have position. (0) LOCK rv lwyaogtesole until shoulder the along slowly Drive
n unteinto wtht the to switch ignition the turn and tpi aepaet hneit. change to place safe a in stop
RN FLOOR TRUNK 2. uno h aadwriglights, warning hazard the on Turn fyuhv lttr hl driving, while tire flat a have you If
hnigaFa Tire Flat a Changing ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４８：４８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３１６ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４８：５７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３１７
Changing a Flat Tire
EXTENSION
TOOL TRAY JACKING POINT WHEEL NUT WRENCH 3. Open the trunk. Raise the trunk 7. Place the jack under the jacking 8. Use the extension and the wheel floor by lifting up on the back edge. point nearest the tire you need to nut wrench as shown to raise the change. Turn the end bracket vehicle until the flat tire is off the 4. Take the tool tray out of the trunk, clockwise until the top of the jack ground. and remove the tools and the jack. contacts the jacking point. Make sure the jacking point tab is 9. Remove the wheel nuts and flat 5. Unscrew the wing bolt and take restinginthejacknotch. tire. Handle the wheel nuts the spare tire out of the trunk. carefully; they may be hot from driving. Place the flat tire on the 6. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn ground with the outside surface of with the wheel nut wrench. the wheel facing up.
314
315
CONTINUED
0lff 18Nm,1 kgf·m) 11 , N·m (108 lbf·ft 80
ihe h he usto: nuts wheel the Tighten driving.
facility. carefully;itmaybehotfrom
h ers uooieservice automotive nearest the la lt.Wp h hub the Wipe cloth. clean a
h he u oqecekdat checked torque nut wheel the ufc fteweladhbwith hub and wheel the of surface
Taking Care of the Unexpected
h aecisrs atr.Have pattern. crisscross same the wipeanydirtoffthemounting
13. 10. ihe h he usscrl in securely nuts wheel the Tighten eoemutn h pr tire, spare the mounting Before
RK HUB BRAKE
n eoetejack. the remove and
oe h eil oteground, the to vehicle the Lower 12.
hmfully. them
h u.D o r otighten to try not Do hub. the
ni h he sfrl against firmly is wheel the until
atr ihtewelntwrench nut wheel the with pattern
hntgtnte nacrisscross a in them tighten then
he usbc nfinger-tight, on back nuts wheel
11. u ntesaetr.Ptthe Put tire. spare the on Put
hnigaFa Tire Flat a Changing ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４９：０５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３１８ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４９：１３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３１９
Changing a Flat Tire
17.Securetheflattirebyscrewing 19.Store the wheel cover or center WING BOLT the wing bolt back into its hole. cap in the trunk. Make sure it does not get scratched or damaged. 18.Store the jack and tools in the tool Lower the trunk floor, then close tray, and place the tool tray back the trunk lid. in the trunk. For For spare normal tire tire Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and could SPACER CONE seriously injure the occupants.
14.Remove the center cap before Store the wheel, jack, and tools storing the flat tire in the trunk securely before driving. well.
15.Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.
16.Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, turn it over, and put it back on the bolt.
316 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４９：２２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３２０
IftheEngineWon’tStart
Diagnosing why the engine won’t Nothing Happens or the Starter Turn the ignition switch to the start falls into two areas, depending Motor Operates Very Slowly START (III) position. If the on what you hear when you turn the When you turn the ignition switch to headlights do not dim, check the ignition switch to the START (III) the START (III) position, you do not condition of the fuses. If the fuses position: hear the normal noise of the engine are OK, there is probably something You hear nothing, or almost trying to start. You may hear a wrong with the electrical circuit for nothing. The engine’s starter clicking sound or series of clicks, or the ignition switch or starter motor. motor does not operate at all, or nothing at all. You will need a qualified technician operates very slowly. Check these things: to determine the problem (see Emergency Towing on page328 ). You can hear the starter motor Check the transmission interlock. operating normally, or the starter If you have a manual transmission, If the headlights dim noticeably or motor sounds like it is spinning the clutch pedal must be pushed go out when you try to start the faster than normal, but the engine all the way to the floor or the engine, either the battery is dis- does not start up and run. starter will not operate. With an charged or the connections are automatic transmission, it must be corroded. Check the condition of the Unexpected the of Care Taking in Park or neutral. battery connections (see page309 ). You can then try jump starting the Turn the ignition switch to the ON vehicle from a booster battery (see (II) position. Turn on the page319 ). headlights, and check their brightness. If the headlights are very dim or do not come on at all, the battery is discharged. See Jump Starting on page319 .
317 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４９：２９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３２１
IftheEngineWon’tStart
The Starter Operates Normally Do you have fuel? Check the fuel In this case, the starter motor’s gauge; the low fuel indicator may speed sounds normal, or even faster not be working. than normal, when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) There may be an electrical position, but the engine does not run. problem, such as no power to the fuel pump. Check all the fuses Are you using a properly coded (see page330 ). key? An improperly coded key will cause the immobilizer system Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill indicator in the instrument panel need a qualified technician to find to blink rapidly (see page126 ). the problem. See Emergency Towing on page328 . Are you using the proper starting procedure? Refer to Starting the Engine on page241 .
318 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４９：３８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３２２
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple To jump start your vehicle: procedure, you should take several precautions.1. Open the hood, and check the physical condition of the battery. In very cold weather, check the condition of the electrolyte. If it A battery can explode if you do seems slushy or frozen, do not try not follow the correct procedure, jump starting until it thaws. seriously injuring anyone nearby. BOOSTER Keep all sparks, open flames, If a battery sits in extreme cold, the BATTERY and smoking materials away electrolyte inside can f reeze. from the battery. Attempting to jump start with a frozen The numbers in the illustration show battery can cause it to rupture. the order to connect the jumper cable. Unexpected the of Care Taking You cannot start your vehicle by 2. Turn off all the electrical pushing or pulling it. accessories: climate control, audio 3. Connect one jumper cable to the system, lights, etc. Put the positive (＋ ) terminal on your transmission in neutral (M/T) or battery. Connect the other end to Park (A/T), and set the parking the positive (＋ ) terminal on the brake. booster battery.
CONTINUED
319 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４９：４４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３２３
Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another 7. Once your vehicle is running, vehicle, have an assistant start disconnect the negative cable from that vehicle and run it at a fast idle. your vehicle, then from the booster battery. Disconnect the 6. Start the vehicle. If the starter positive cable from your vehicle, motor still operates slowly, check then from the booster battery. that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact. Keep the ends of the jumper cables away from each other and any metal on the vehicle until everything is disconnected. Otherwise, you may cause an electrical short. 4. Connect the second jumper cable to the negative (－ ) terminal on the booster battery. Connect the other end to the grounding strap as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part of the engine.
320 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：４９：５３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３２４
IftheEngineOverheats
The reading of the vehicle’s 3. If you do not see steam or spray, temperature gauge should stay in leave the engine running, and the midrange. If it climbs to the red Steam and spray from an watch the temperature gauge. If mark, you should determine the overheated engine can the high heat is due to overloading, reason (hot day, driving up a steep seriously scald you. the engine should start to cool hill, etc.). down almost immediately. If it Do not open the hood if steam does, wait until the temperature If your vehicle overheats, you should is coming out. gauge reading comes down to the take immediate action. The only midpoint, then continue driving. indicationmaybethetemperature gauge climbing to or above the red 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the temperature gauge stays at mark. Or you may see steam or Put the transmission in neutral the red mark, turn off the engine. spray coming from under the hood. (M/T) or Park (A/T), and set the parking brake. Turn off all 5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, accessories, and turn on the such as a split radiator hose. hazard warning indicators. Everything is still extremely hot, Unexpected the of Care Taking Driving with the temperature gauge so use caution. If you find a leak, it pointer at the red mark can cause 2. If you see steam and/or spray must be repaired before you serious damage to the engine. coming from under the hood, turn continue driving (see Emergency off the engine. Wait until you see Towing on page328 ). no more signs of steam or spray, then open the hood.
CONTINUED
321 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５０：０１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３２５
IftheEngineOverheats
6.If you do not find an obvious leak, 8. Using gloves or a large heavy 10.Put the radiator cap back on check the coolant level in the cloth, turn the radiator cap tightly. Run the engine, and watch radiator reserve tank. Add coolant counterclockwise, without pushing the temperature gauge. If it goes if the level is below the MIN mark. down, to the first stop. After the back to the red mark, the engine pressure releases, push down on needs repair (see Emergency 7. If there was no coolant in the the cap, and turn it until it comes Towing on page328 ). reserve tank, you may need to add off. coolant to the radiator. Let the 11.If the temperature stays normal, engine cool down until the reading 9. Start the engine, and set the check the coolant level in the reaches the middle of the temperature to maximum heat radiator reserve tank. If it has temperature gauge or lower (climate control to AUTO at gone down, add coolant to the before checking the radiator. ‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the MAX mark. Put the cap back on radiator up to the base of the filler tightly. neck. If you do not have the proper coolant mixture available, Removing the radiator cap you can add plain water. while the engine is hot can Remember to have the cooling cause the coolant to spray out, system drained and refilled with seriously scalding you. the proper mixture as soon as you can. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
322 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５０：０８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３２６
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
This indicator should never 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut come on when the engine is off the engine. Turn on the hazard running. If it starts flashing or stays warning indicators. on, or if you see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message in the multi- 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. information display, the oil pressure Open the hood, and check the oil has dropped very low or lost level (see page232 ). An engine pressure. Serious engine damage is very low on oil can lose pressure possible, and you should take during cornering and other driving immediate action. maneuvers.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the level back to the full mark on the Running the engine with low oil dipstick (see page278 ). pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately. Turn of f 4. Start the engine and watch the oil Unexpected the of Care Taking the engine as soon as you can saf ely get pressure indicator. If it does not go the vehicle stopped. out within 10 seconds, turn off the engine. There is a mechanical problem that needs to be repaired before you can continue driving (seeEmergency Towing on page 328 ).
323 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５０：１５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３２７
Charging System Indicator, Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Charging System Malfunction Indicator If you have recently refueled your Indicator Lamp vehicle, the cause of this indicator If the charging system indicator If this indicator comes on while coming on could be a loose or comes on brightly when the engine driving, or if you see a ‘‘CHECK missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap is running, or if you see a ‘‘CHECK EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message in or replace it. Tightening the cap will CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message in the multi-information display, it not make the indicator turn off the multi-information display, the means one of the engine’s emissions immediately; it takes several days of battery is not being charged. control systems may have a problem. normal driving. Even though you may feel no Immediately turn off all electrical difference in your vehicle’s If the indicator remains on or the accessories. Try not to use other performance, it can reduce your fuel fuel cap was not loose or missing, electrically operated controls such as economy and cause increased have the vehicle checked by the the power windows. Keep the engine emissions. Continued operation may dealer as soon as possible. running; starting the engine will cause serious damage. discharge the battery rapidly. Go to a service station or garage where you can get technical assistance.
324 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５０：２０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３２８
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Readiness Codes To check if they are set, turn the Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness ignition switch to the ON (II) If you keep driving with the codes’’ that are part of the on-board position, without starting the engine. Malf unction Indicator Lamp on, you diagnostics for the emissions The malfunction indicator lamp will can damage your vehicle’s emissions systems. In some states, part of the come on for 20 seconds. If it then controls and engine. Those repairs may emissions testing is to make sure goes off, the readiness codes are set. not be covered by your vehicle’s these codes are set. If they are not If it blinks five times, the readiness warranties. This indicator may also set, the test cannot be completed. codes are not set. If possible, do not come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator. take your vehicle for a state If your vehicle’s battery has been emissions test until the readiness disconnected or gone dead, these codes are set. Refer to State codes are erased. It takes at least Emissions Testing for more three days of driving under various information (see page347 ). conditions to set the codes again. aigCr fteUnexpected the of Care Taking
325 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５０：２８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３２９
Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada However, if the brake pedal does not Slow down by shifting to a lower feel normal, you should take gear, and pull to the side of the road If the brake system indicator comes immediate action. A problem in one when it is safe. Because of the long on while driving, the brake fluid level part of the system’s dual circuit distance needed to stop, it is is probably low. You will see a design will still give you braking at hazardous to drive the vehicle. You ‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ message in two wheels. You will feel the brake should have it towed and repaired as the multi-information display. Press pedal go down much farther before soon as possible (see Emergency lightly on the brake pedal to see if it the vehicle begins to slow down, and Towing on page328 ). feels normal. If it does, check the you will have to press harder on the brake fluid level the next time you pedal. If you must drive the vehicle a short stop at a service station (see page distance in this condition, drive 288 ). You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE slowly and carefully. SYSTEM’’ message in the multi- information display when this If the ABS indicator comes on with indicator comes on. this indicator, have the vehicle inspected by your dealer immediately.
326 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５０：３７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３３０
Closing the Moonroof
If the electric motor will not close ROUND PLUG SOCKET the moonroof, do the following:
1. Check the fuse for the moonroof motor (see page334 ). If the fuse is blown, replace it with one of the same or lower rating.
2. Try closing the moonroof. If the new fuse blows immediately or the moonroof motor still does not operate, you can close the MOONROOF WRENCH moonroof manually. 4. Use a screwdriver or coin to If you need to close the moonroof 3. Get the moonroof wrench out of remove the round plug in the manually, it means the moonroof the tool kit in the trunk. center of the headliner. opening/closing function is Unexpected the of Care Taking developing a problem. Have your 5. Insert the moonroof wrench into vehicle checked by your dealer. the socket behind this plug. Turn the wrench until the moonroof is fully closed.
6. Remove the wrench. Reinstall the round plug.
327 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５０：４８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３３１
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, If, due to damage, your vehicle must call a professional towing service or be towed with the front wheels on organization. Never tow your vehicle the ground, do this: Improper towing preparation will with just a rope or chain. It is very damage the transmission. Follow the dangerous. Manual transmission: above procedure exactly. If you cannot Release the parking brake. shif t the transmission or start the Therearetwowaystotowyour Shift the transmission to neutral. engine (automatic transmission), your vehicle: Leave the ignition switch in the vehicle must be transported with the ACCESSORY (I) position so the f ront wheels of f the ground. Flat-bed Equipment － The operator steering wheel does not lock. loads your vehicle on the back of a With the front wheels on the ground, truck. This is the best way to trans- Automatic transmission: it is best to tow the vehicle no farther port your vehicle. Release the parking brake. than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the Start the engine. speedbelow35mph(55km/h). Wheel-lift Equipment － The tow ShifttoD,thentoN. truck uses two pivoting arms that go Turn off the engine. under the tires (front) and lift them Leave the ignition switch in the off the ground. The other two tires ACCESSORY (I) position so the remain on the ground. This is an steering wheel does not lock. acceptable way to tow your vehicle.
328 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５０：５２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３３２
Emergency Towing
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the The steering system can be damaged if bumpers will cause serious damage. the steering wheel is locked. Leave the The bumpers are not designed to ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) support the vehicle’s weight. position, and make sure the steering wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin towing. aigCr fteUnexpected the of Care Taking
329 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５１：０２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３３３
Fuses
INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD Checking and Replacing Fuses If something electrical in your vehicle stops working, the first thing youshouldcheckforisablownfuse. NOTCH TAB Determine from the chart on pages 333and 334 , or the diagram on the fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses control that component. Check those fuses first, but check all the fuses before deciding that a blown fuse is not the cause. Replace any blown fuses and check if the device works.
The interior fuse box is on the The under-hood fuse box is located 1. Turn the ignition switch to the driver’s lower left side. To remove near the back of the engine compart- LOCK (0) position. Make sure the the fuse box lid, pull it toward you ment on the driver’s side. To open it, headlights and all other and take it out of its hinges. pushthetabsasshown. accessories are off.
2. Remove the cover from the fuse box.
330 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５１：０８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３３４
Fuses
BLOWN BLOWN BLOWN
3.Check each of the large fuses in 4.Check the smaller fuses in the 5. Look for a burned wire inside the the under-hood fuse box by under-hood fuse box and all the fuse. If it is burned out, replace it looking at the wire inside. fuses in the interior fuse box by withoneofthesparefusesofthe Unexpected the of Care Taking Removing these fuses requires a pulling out each one with the fuse same rating or lower. Phillips-head screwdriver. puller provided in the under-hood fuse box.
CONTINUED
331 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５１：１５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３３５
Fuses
If you replace the blown fuse with a If the driver’s power window fuse is spare fuse that has a lower rating, it removed, the AUTO function of the FUSE PULLER might blow out again. This does not driver’s window will be disabled. You indicate anything wrong. Replace the should reset the AUTO feature, (see fuse with one of the correct rating as page148 ). soon as you can. If the radio fuse is removed, the audio system will disable itself. The nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou Replacing a f use with one that has a will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency higher rating greatly increases the display. Use the preset buttons to chances of damaging the electrical enter the five-digit code (see page system. If you do not have a 201 ). If you cannot drive the vehicle replacement f use with the proper rating without fixing the problem, and you f or the circuit, install one with a lower do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse rating. of the same rating or a lower rating from one of the other circuits with 6. If the replacement fuse of the the fuse puller provided in the under- same rating blows in a short time, hood fuse box. Make sure you can there is probably a serious do without that circuit temporarily electrical problem with your (such as the accessory power socket vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in or radio). that circuit, and have your vehicle checked by a qualified mechanic.
332 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５１：２３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３３６
Fuses
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected
11 20 A Cooling Fan 12 － Not Used 13 20 A Horn, Stop 14 40 A Rear Defroster 15 40 A Back Up, ACC 16 15 A Hazard 17 30 A VSA Motor 18 40 A VSA 19 40 A OP 1 20 40 A OP 2 21 40 A Heater Motor 22 100 A Battery
－ Not Used Unexpected the of Care Taking No.Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 23 50 A ＋BIG1Main 50 A Power Window Main 1 15 A Left Headlight Low 6 15 A Right Headlight Low 2 (30 A) (Rear Defroster Coil) 7 7.5 A Back Up 3 10 A Left Headlight Hi 8 15 A FI ECU (ECM/PCM) 4 15 A Small Light 9 20 A Condenser fan 5 10 A Right Headlight Hi 10 (20 A) (FR Fog Light)
CONTINUED
333 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５１：３１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３３７
Fuses
INTERIOR FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected
13 20 A Passenger’s Power Seat Reclining 14 20 A Driver’s Power Seat Sliding 15 (20 A) Heated Seat 16 20 A Driver’s Power Seat Reclining 17 (20 A) Passenger’s Power Seat Sliding 18 15 A ACG 19 15 A Fuel Pump 20 10 A Washer 21 7.5 A Meter 22 10 A SRS 23 7.5 A IGP (PGM-FI ECU) 24 20 A Left Rear Power Window No. Amps.Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 25 20 A Right Rear Power Window 26 20 A Passenger’s Power Window 1 (15 A) DBW 7 10 A Back-Up Lights 27 20 A Driver’s Power Window 2 15 A Ignition Coil 8 20 A Door Lock 28 20 A Moonroof 3 (10 A) Daytime Running Light＊ 9 15 A Front Accessory Sockets 29 － Not Used 4 10 A LAF 10 7.5 A OPDS 30 7.5 A A/C 5 20 A Audio Amp 11 30 A Wiper 31 － Not Used 6 10 A Interior Light 12 － Not Used 32 7.5 A ACC 33 － Not Used ＊ : On Canadian models
334 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５１：３８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３３８
Technical Information
Thediagramsinthissectiongive Identification Numbers...... 336 State Emissions Testing...... 347 you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications...... 338 your vehicle, and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading identification numbers. It also (U.S.Vehicles)...... 341 includes information you should Uniform Tire Quality know about your vehicle’s tires and Grading...... 341 emissions control systems. Treadwear...... 341 Traction...... 341 Temperature...... 342 Tire Labeling...... 343 Emissions Controls...... 344 The Clean Air Act...... 344 Crankcase Emissions Control System...... 344 Evaporative Emissions Control System...... 344 Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery...... 344 Information Technical Exhaust Emissions Controls... . 345 PGM-FI System...... 345 Ignition Timing Control System...... 345 Three Way Catalytic Converter...... 345 Replacement Parts...... 345 Three Way Catalytic Converter.. . 346
335 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５１：４２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３３９
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying numbers in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the 17-digit number your dealer uses to register your vehicle for warranty purposes. It is also necessary for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The easiest place to find the VIN is on a plate fastened to the top of the dashboard. You can seeitbylookingthroughthe windshield on the driver’s side. It is also on the certification label attached to the driver’s doorjamb, and is stamped on the engine compartment bulkhead. The VIN is also provided in bar code on the certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
336 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５１：４６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３４０
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into the engine block. It is on the front. ENGINE NUMBER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
The transmission number is on a label on top of the transmission. ehia Information Technical
MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
337 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５２：０２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３４１
Specifications
Dimensions Capacities Length 183.3 in (4,657 mm) Engine Change＊1 Width 69.4 in (1,762 mm) coolant Manual 1.43 US gal (5.4 ) Height 57.3 in (1,456 mm) Automatic 1.45 US gal (5.5 ) Wheelbase 105.1 in (2,670 mm) Total Track Front 59.6 in (1,515 mm) Manual 1.96 US gal (7.4 ) Rear 59.6 in (1,515 mm) Automatic 1.93 US gal (7.3 ) Engine oil Change＊2 Weights Including 4.4 US qt (4.2 ) Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached filter to the driver’s doorjamb. Without 4.2 US qt (4.0 ) filter Air Conditioning Total 5.6 US qt (5.3 ) Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) Manual trans- Change 2.1 US qt (2.0 ) Charge quantity 25－－ 27 oz (700 750 g) mission oil Total 2.3 US qt (2.2 ) Lubricant type ND-OIL8 Automatic Change 3.0 US qt (2.8 ) transmission Total 6.9 US qt (6.5 ) Capacities fluid Fuel tank Approx. Windshield U.S. Models 2.6 US qt (2.5 ) 17.1 US gal (64.7 ) washer Canada Models 4.8 US qt (4.5 ) reservoir
＊1:Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 ) ＊2:Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
338 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５２：２７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３４２
Specifications
Lights Battery Headlights High 12 V － 55 W Capacity 12 V 36 AH/5 HR Low 12 V － 35 W ＊ Front fog lights 12 V－ 55 W Fuses Front turn signal 12 V － 21 W Interior See page 334 or the fuse label Front parking lights/ 12 V － 3CP attached to the inside of the fuse Side marker lights box door on each side of the Rear turn signal lights 12 V － 21 W dashboard. Stop/Taillights 12 V－ 21/5 W Under-hood See page 333 or the fuse box Taillights 12 V － 5W cover. High-mount brake light 12 V － 21 W Back-up lights 12 V－ 21 W Engine Rear side marker lights 12 V － 3CP Type Water cooled 4-stroke, DOHC License plate light 12 V－ 3 CP i-VTEC 4-cylinder, gasoline engine Ceiling light 12 V － 8W BorexStroke 3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm) Spotlights/Front ceiling lights 12 V － 8W Displacement 144 cu-in (2,354 cm ) Trunk light 12 V－ 5 W Compression ratio 10.5 : 1 Door courtesy lights 12 V － 2CP Spark plugs NGK: IZFR6K-11 Vanity mirror lights 12 V－ 1.1 W DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11 ehia Information Technical ＊ : On vehicles with high voltage discharge type headlights, Alignment replacement of a headlight bulb should be performed by your dealer. Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm) Rear 0.08 in (2.0 mm) Camber Front 0° Rear －1° CasterFront 3°13’
CONTINUED 339 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５２：３３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３４３
Specifications
Tires Size Front/Rear P215/50R17 93V Spare T135/80D16 101M Pressure Front 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) Rear 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
340 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５２：４０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３４４
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction－ AA, A, B, C U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on (DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance. Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi- applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade between the tread shoulder and the depart significantly from the norm assignedtothistireisbasedon maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests, example: service practices, and differences in and does not include acceleration, Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak Traction AA traction characteristics. Temperature A Information Technical
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
341 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５２：４５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３４５
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature－ A,B,C Warning: The temperature grade for The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not tire’s resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed, heat, and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading, when tested under controlled either separately or in combination, conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure. temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of performance that all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
342 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５３：０１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３４６
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle 16 － Rim diameter in inches. 2202 － Date of manufacture. have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described 94 － Load index (a numerical code Maximum Tire Pressure below. associated with the maximum Max Press－ The maximum air load the tire can carry). pressurethetirecan Tire Size hold. Whenever tires are replaced, they V － Speed symbol (an should be replaced with tires of the alphabetical code indicating Maximum Tire Load same size. Following is an example the maximum speed rating). Max Load － The maximum load the of tire size with an explanation of tire can carry at what each component means. Tire Identification Number maximum air pressure. The tire identification number (TIN) P215/50R17 93V is a group of numbers and letters that look like the following example P － Vehicletype(Pindicates TIN. passenger vehicle). DOT B97R FW6X 2202
225 － Tire width in millimeters. DOT － This indicates that the tire Information Technical meets all requirements of 55 － Aspect ratio (the tire’s section the U.S. Department of height as a percentage of its Transportation. width). B97R － Manufacturer’s R － Tire construction code (R identification mark. indicates radial). FW6X － Tire type code.
343 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５３：０９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３４７
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act intake manifold. They are then vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act＊ drawn into the engine and burned. products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that Evaporative Emissions Control (NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to System Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls As gasoline evaporates in the fuel also produces hydrocarbons. Con- workandwhattodotomaintain tank, an evaporative emissions trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how control canister filled with charcoal and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this ment. Under certain conditions of canister while the engine is off. After sunlight and climate, NOx and HC ＊ In Canada, Acura vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up, react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine Carbon monoxide does not contri- requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving. bute to smog creation, but it is a agreement with Environment poisonous gas. Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor manufactured. Recovery The onboard refueling vapor Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures System the fuel vapors during refueling. The Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off. the atmosphere. The positive crankcase ventilation valve routes them from the crankcase back to the
344 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５３：１８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３４８
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controlsunder all operating conditions. Replacement Parts The exhaust emissions controls The emissions control systems are include three systems: PGM-FI, Ignition Timing Control System designed and certified to work ignition timing control, and three This system constantly adjusts the together in reducing emissions to way catalytic converter. These three ignition timing, reducing the amount levels that comply with the Clean Air systems work together to control the of HC, CO, and NOx produced. Act. To make sure the emissions engine’s combustion and minimize remain low, you should use only new the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that Three Way Catalytic Converter Acura replacement parts or their comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust The three way catalytic converter is equivalent for repairs. Using lower emissions control systems are in the exhaust system. Through quality parts may increase the separate from the crankcase and chemical reactions, it converts HC, emissions from your vehicle. evaporative emissions control CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust systems. to carbon dioxide (CO2 ), nitrogen The emissions control systems are (N2 ), and water vapor. covered by warranties separate from PGM-FI System the rest of your vehicle. Read your The PGM-FI system uses sequential warranty manual for more informa- multiport fuel injection. It has three tion. subsystems: air intake, engine Information Technical control, and fuel control. The powertrain control module (PCM) in automatic transmission vehicles or the engine control module (ECM) in manual transmission vehicles uses various sensors to determine how much air is going into the engine. It then controls how much fuel to inject
345 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５３：２４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３４９
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter Keep the engine tuned-up. contains precious metals that serve as catalysts, promoting chemical Have your vehicle diagnosed and reactions to convert the exhaust repaired if it is misfiring, back- gasses without affecting the metals. firing, stalling, or otherwise not The catalytic converter is referred to running properly. as a three-way catalyst, since it acts on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement unit must be an original Acura part or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER must operate at a high temperature for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic place. It can set on fire any converter contributes to air pollution, combustible materials that come and can impair your engine’s per- near it. Park your vehicle away from formance. Follow these guidelines to high grass, dry leaves, or other protect your vehicle’s three way flammables. catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount of leaded gasoline can contaminate the catalyst metals, making the three way catalytic converter ineffective.
346 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５３：３２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３５０
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that Without touching the accelerator If you take your vehicle for a state the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds. battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle retested within the Keep the vehicle in Park This is because of certain ‘‘readiness next two or three days, you can (automatic transmission) or codes’’ that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for retesting by Neutral (manual transmission). board diagnostics for the emissions doing the following. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 systems. These codes are erased rpm,andholditthereuntilthe when the battery is disconnected, Make sure the gas tank is nearly, temperature gauge rises to at least and set again only after several days but not completely, full (around 1/4ofthescale(about3minutes). of driving under a variety of 3/4). conditions. Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 6 hours or more.
Make sure the ambient Information Technical temperature is between 40° and 95°F.
CONTINUED
347 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５３：３７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３５１
State Emissions Testing
Select a nearby lightly traveled Then drive in city/suburban major highway where you can traffic for at least 10 minutes. maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph When traffic conditions allow, let (80to97km/h)foratleast20 the vehicle coast for several minutes. Drive on the highway in seconds without using the D (A/T) or 6th (M/T). Do not use accelerator pedal or the brake thecruisecontrol.Whentraffic pedal. allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator Stop the vehicle, turn off the pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary ignition switch, and leave it off for slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot 30 minutes. do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic If the testing facility determines the conditions, drive for at least 30 readiness codes are still not set, see seconds, then repeat it two more your dealer. times (for a total of 90 seconds).
348 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５３：４０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３５２
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information.... . 350 Warranty Coverages...... 351 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicle)...... 352
Authorized Manuals...... 353 Relations Customer and Warranty
349 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５３：４８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３５３
Customer Service Information
Acura dealership personnel are U.S. Owners: In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin trained professionals. They should American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Islands: be able to answer all your questions. Acura Client Services If you encounter a problem that your Mail Stop 500-2N-7E Vortex Motor Corp. dealership does not solve to your 1919 Torrance Blvd. Bella International satisfaction, please discuss it with Torrance, CA 90501-2746 P.O. Box 190816 the dealership’s management. The San Juan, PR 00919-0816 service manager or general manager Tel: (800) 382-2238 Tel: can help. Almost all problems are Tel: (787) 620-7028 solved in this way. Canadian Owners: CUSTOMER RELATIONS When you call or write, please give If you are dissatisfied with the RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE us this information: decision made by the dealership’s Honda Canada Inc. management, contact the Acura 715 Milner Avenue Vehicle Identification Number Customer Service Office. Toronto, ON (see page260 ) M1B 2K8 Name and address of the dealer who services your vehicle Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9 Date of purchase Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909 Mileage on your vehicle Toronto (416) 287-4776 Your name, address, and tele- phone number A detailed description of the problem Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
350 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５３：５９ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３５４
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty － a seat Replacement Battery Limited Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty － provides prorated warranties: covered for the useful life of the coverage for a replacement battery vehicle. purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty － Relations Customer and Warranty covers your new vehicle, except for Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler Lifetime the battery, emissions control －－all exterior body panels are Limited Warranty provides systems, and accessories, against covered for rust-through from the coverageforaslongasthepur- defects in materials and inside for the specified time period chaser of the muffler owns the workmanship. with no mileage limit. vehicle.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Accessory Limited Warranty － Restrictions and exclusions apply to Warranty and Emissions Acura accessories are covered under all these warranties. Please read the Performance Warranty － these two this warranty. Time and mileage 2006 Acura Warranty Information warranties cover your vehicle’s limits depend on the type of booklet that came with your vehicle emissions control systems. Time, accessory and other factors. Please for precise information on warranty mileage, and coverage are read your warranty manual for coverages. Your vehicle’s original conditional. Please read your details. tires are covered by their warranty booklet for exact manufacturer. Tire warranty information. Replacement Parts Limited information is in a separate booklet. Warranty － covers all Acura Original Equipment Battery Limited replacement parts against defects in Canadian Owners Warranty － this warranty gives up materials and workmanship. Please refer to the 2006 warranty to 100 % credit toward a replacement manual that came with your vehicle. battery.
351 ０５／０９／２６ １６：０９：２４ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３５５
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar com- To contact NHTSA, you may call the defect which could cause a crash or plaints, it may open an investigation, VehicleSafetyHotlinetoll-freeat could cause injury or death, you and if it finds that a safety defect 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); should immediately inform the exists in a group of vehicles, it may go to http://www.safercar.gov; or National Highway Traffic Safety order a recall and remedy campaign. write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, Administration (NHTSA), in addition However, NHTSA cannot become DC 20590. to notifying American Honda Motor involved in individual problems You can also obtain other Co., Inc. between you, your dealer, or information about motor vehicle American Honda Motor Co., Inc. safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
352 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５４：１３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３５６
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm owners should contact their authorized Acura dealer. Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways: Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356 Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) (NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only) Go online at www. helminc. com Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M.－ 6:00 P.M. EST If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00 at 1-800-782-4356. OR Publication Form Description Price By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can Form Number Each＊ pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to 61SEA02 2004-2006 Acura TSX Service Manual $75.00 Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form. 61SEA02EL 2004-2006 Acura TSX $50.00 Authorized Manuals Electrical Troubleshooting Manual VEHICLE MODEL Price Total PUBLICATION NUMBER Qty 61SEA30 2004-2006 Acura TSX Body Repair Manual $44.00 ２ Name Year Each＊ Price 31SEA620 2006 Acura TSX Owner’s Manual $37.00 ０ ０ 31SEA720 2006 Acura TSX Navigation $29.00 ６ System Owner’s Manual 31SEA920 2006 Acura TSX Maintenance Journal $12.00 Ａ Ｃ 31SEAQ20 2006 Acura TSX Quick Start Guide $12.00 Ｕ ACU-R Order Form for Previous Years- FREE
＊ Indicate Year and Model Desired Prices are subject to change without TOTAL MATERIAL ＊ Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. notice and without incurring obligation. Mich. Purchases Add 6% Sales Tax
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please HANDLING CHARGE $6.95 allow adequate time for delivery. GRAND TOTAL CONTINUED 353 ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５４：２１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３５７
Authorized Manuals
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, Service Manual: and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown This manual covers maintenance and recommended below for a quotation. procedures for repair to engine and chassis components. Ｓ It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple Ｈ enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under- Ｉ stand. Ｐ Customer Name Attention Electrical Troubleshooting Manual: Ｔ Street Address－ No P.O. Box Number Apartment Number This manual complements the service manual by Ｏ providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each City State & Zip Code electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Daytime Telephone Number () Body Repair Manual: This manual describes the procedures involved in the
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc－ U.S. funds only. replacement of damaged body parts. Ｐ Do not send cash
Ａ Master VISA Check here if your billing address is different Ｙ Card from the shipping address shown above. Ｍ Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.
Ｅ － Ｎ Ｔ
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14 days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
354
I
ra-n e iig 228 ...... Linings New Break-in, CONTINUED
nilc ytm(B).253 ...... (ABS) System Anti-lock uoai etBl esonr 23 . . Tensionners Belt Seat Automatic
Brakes uoai ihigOf.121 ...... Off Lighting Automatic
ose et 53 ...... Seats Booster ui ytm.170 ...... System Audio
INDEX eeaeHles.156 ...... Holders Beverage ok.127 ...... Lock
ub,Hlgn.291 ...... Halogen Bulbs, et,Sa 10 ...... Seat Belts, nitetSern Column Steering Anti-theft
unSga ihs.23 295 293, ...... Lights Signal Turn eoeDiig.227 ...... Driving Before nitet ui ytm.201 ...... System Audio Anti-theft,
pcfctos.339 ...... Specifications pcfctos.339 ...... Specifications prto 253 ...... Operation
ihmutBaeLgt.297 ...... Light Brake High-mount aneac 309 ...... Maintenance esg 82 ...... Message
edihs.291 ...... Headlights upSatn 319 ...... Starting Jump niao 6 253 66, ...... Indicator
rn akn ihs.294 ...... Lights Parking Front esg 83 ...... Message nilc rks(ABS) Brakes Anti-lock
o ihs.298 ...... Lights Fog niao 2 324 62, ...... Indicator loo nGsln 228 ...... Gasoline in Alcohol
rk ihs.295 ...... Lights Brake hrigSystem Charging i rsue ie 304 ...... Tires Pressure, Air
ubReplacement Bulb Battery sg 162 ...... Usage
rgt,Halgt 120 ...... Headlights Brights, i odtoig.160 ...... Conditioning Air
B ntuet 122 ...... Instruments ibgSse opnns.25 ...... Components System Airbag
rgtesControl, Brightness ibg(R).11 ...... (SRS) Airbag
ra-n e eil 228 ...... Vehicle New Break-in, uiir nu ak.184 ...... Jack Input Auxiliary dutOtieTm.Dsly.95 ...... Display Temp. Outside Adjust
rkn ytm.252 . System Braking ...... hf okRlae.249 ...... Release Lock Shift dutn h on 175 ...... Sound the Adjusting
rkn li o esg 79 ...... Message Low Fluid Braking hf ee oiin 244 ...... Positions Lever Shift diie,Egn i 279 ...... Oil Engine Additives,
erIdctr 252 ...... Indicators Wear hf ee oiinIdctr.244 . . Indicator Position Lever Shift cesr oe okt.156 ...... Socket Power Accessory
ytmMsae.83 ...... Message System hfig.244 ...... Shifting oiin 127 ...... Position)
ytmIdctr.63 ...... Indicator System eunilSothf oe.246 . .... Mode SportShift Sequential CESR Into Key (Ignition ACCESSORY
akn 151 ...... Parking hcigFudLvl.285 ...... Level Fluid Checking cesre 234 ...... Accessories
li 288 ...... Fluid aaiyFud.338 ...... Capacity,Fluid
A ubRpaeet.295 ...... Replacement Bulb uoai rnmsin.244 ...... Transmission Automatic
Index ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５４：２８ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３５８ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５４：３１ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３５９
Index
C Check Engine Oil Level Consumer Information...... 350 Message...... 81 Controls, Instruments and...... 59 Capacities Chart...... 338 Checklist, Before Driving...... 240 Coolant Carbon Monoxide Hazard...... 56 Check Transmission Message...... 82 Adding...... 283 Carrying Cargo...... 23 Check VSA System Message...... 81 Checking...... 232 CAUTION, Explanation of...... ii Child Safety...... 37 Proper Solution...... 233 CD Care...... 194 Booster Seats...... 53 Temperature Gauge...... 68 CD Changer...... 185 Child Seats...... 45 Crankcase Emissions Control CD Error Message...... 193 Important Safety Reminders...... 37 System...... 344 Center Pocket...... 155 Infants...... 42 Cruise Control Message...... 84 Certification Label...... 336 Larger Children...... 52 Cruise Control Operation...... 204 Chains...... 308 LATCH...... 47 Cruise Main Indicator...... 66, 204 Changing a Flat Tire...... 313 Risk with Airbag...... 38 Cup Holders...... 156 Changing Oil Small Children...... 43 Customer Service Office...... 350 How to...... 280 Tethers...... 50 Customized Settings...... 85 When to...... 266 Where Should a Child Sit？ ...... 38 Door · Window Setup...... 109 Charging System Indicator... . 62, 324 Childproof Door Locks...... 129 Lighting Setup...... 105 Message...... 83 Child Seats...... 37 Meter Setup...... 92 Check ABS System Message...... 82 Lower Anchorage Points...... 47 Position Setup...... 103 Check Airbag System Message.... . 82 Tether Anchorage Points...... 50 Setting to Default...... 89 Check Brake System Message...... 83 Climate Control Sensors...... 169 Wiper Setup...... 116 Check Charging System Clock, Setting the...... 202 Message...... 83 Clutch Fluid...... 289 Check DRL System Message...... 84 Cold Weather, Starting in...... 241 Check Emission System Compact Spare Tire...... 312 Message...... 83 Console Compartment...... 157
II
III
mrec lses.123 ...... Flashers Emergency rvradPsegrSft 7 ...... Safety Passenger and Driver CONTINUED
mrec rk 151 ...... Brake Emergency rnmsin.242 ...... Transmission
et y.19 ...... by Belts oig.328 ...... Towing onhfig -pe Manual 6-speed Downshifting,
xetn ohr,Ueo Seat of Use Mothers, Expectant vretdEgn 321 ...... Engine Overheated O ieQaiyGaig.341 ...... Grading Quality Tire DOT
INDEX xas ue 56 ...... Fumes Exhaust aulyCoigMoro 326 . ... Moonroof Closing Manually orLc oe.110 ...... Mode Lock Door
vprtv msin otos.344 . . Controls Emissions Evaporative afnto niao ap.324 . ... Lamp Indicator Malfunction oe orLc 128 ...... Lock Door Power
tao nGsln 228 ...... Gasoline in Ethanol o i rsueIdctr.323 ...... Indicator Pressure Oil Low n rn pn.1,78 13, ...... Open Trunk And
/ 249 ...... M/T aadWrigFahr 123 ...... Flashers Warning Hazard oku rvnin.129 ...... Prevention Lockout
/ 243 ...... A/T hcigteFss.330 ...... Fuses the Checking okn n nokn 128 ...... Unlocking and Locking
nieSedLimiter Speed Engine hrigSse niao 324 ...... Indicator System Charging Doors
trig.241 ...... Starting hnigaFa ie.313 ...... Tire Flat a Changing ipslo sdOl.281 ...... Oil Used of Disposal
pe iie 4,249 243, ...... Limiter Speed rk ytmIdctr.326 ...... Indicator System Brake icBaeWa niaos.252 ...... Indicators Wear Brake Disc
pcfctos.339 ...... Specifications atr,Jm trig.319 ...... Starting Jump Battery, ietoa inl 120 ...... Signals Directional
vretn 321 ...... Overheating mrece nteRa 311 ...... Road the on Emergencies nieOl.232 ...... Oil Engine
i,Wa idt s 278 ...... Use to Kind What Oil, lp ieRstCniin.99 ...... Condition Reset Time Elap. uoai rnmsin.285 ...... Transmission Automatic
i rsueIdctr.323 ...... Indicator Pressure Oil cnm,Fe 233 ...... Fuel Economy, Dipstick
i ieDsly.266 ...... Display Life Oil imn h edihs.120 ...... Headlights the Dimming
E ap.324 ...... Lamp iesos.338 ...... Dimensions
afnto Indicator Malfunction eogr erWno 123 ...... Window Rear Defogger,
fI o’ tr 317 ...... Start Won’t It If utadPle itr.300 ...... Filter Pollen and Dust eet,RprigSft 352 ...... Safety Reporting Defects,
oln eprtr ag 68 . .... Gauge Temperature Coolant ulTmeaueCnrl.167 ...... Control Temperature Dual eal l 89 ...... All Default
Engine eoySse 142 ...... System Memory atm unn ihs.121 ...... Lights Running Daytime
msin etn,Sae.347 ...... State Testing, Emissions rvn Position Driving ahor ,60 4, ...... Dashboard
msin otos.344 ...... Controls Emissions cnm 233 ...... Economy AGR xlnto f.ii ...... of Explanation DANGER,
mrec rn pnr.136 ...... Opener Trank Emergency rvn 239 ...... Driving
D mrec oig.328 ...... Towing Emergency rvrI 85 ...... ID Driver
Index ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５４：３６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３６０ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５４：４０ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３６１
Index
F Fill Door and Cap...... 229 Gearshift Lever Positions Gauge...... 68 Automatic Transmission...... 244 Fan, Interior...... 164 Low Fuel Indicator...... 66 Manual Transmission...... 242 Fasten Seat Belt Message...... 78 Low Message...... 80 Glove Box...... 158 Features...... 159 Octane Requirement...... 228 Filling the Fuel Tank...... 229 Tank, Filling the...... 229 H Filter Tighten Fuel Cap...... 80 Dust and Pollen...... 300 Fuses, Checking the...... 330 Halogen Headlight Bulbs...... 291 Oil...... 280 Hands Free LinkTM...... 211 Flashers, Hazard Warning...... 123 G Hazard Warning Flashers...... 123 Flat Tire, Changing a...... 313 Headlights...... 120 Floor Mats...... 299 Gas Mileage, Improving...... 233 Aiming...... 291 Fluids Gasoline...... 228 Automatic Lighting Off...... 121 Automatic Transmission...... 285 Gauge...... 68 Auto Off Timer...... 107 Brake...... 288 Low Fuel Indicator...... 66 Daytime Running Lights...... 121 Clutch...... 289 Octane Requirement...... 228 High Beam Indicator...... 66 Manual Transmission...... 287 Tank, Filling the...... 229 Low Beams, Turning on...... 120 Power Steering...... 289 Gas Station Procedures...... 229 Reminder Chime...... 120 Windshield Washer...... 282 Gauges Replacing Halogen Bulbs...... 291 Fog Lights...... 121 Engine Coolant Temperature... . 68 Turning on...... 120 Folding Rear Seat...... 140 Fuel...... 68 Head Restraints...... 139 Four-way Flashers...... 123 Speedometer...... 68 Heated Mirror...... 146 Front Airbags...... 28 Tachometer...... 68 Heated Seat...... 137 Front Wiper Action...... 116 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight High Altitude, Starting at...... 241 Fuel...... 228 Rating)...... 258 HomeLink Universal Cap Message...... 79 Transceiver...... 207
IV
V
nrdcin.i ...... Introduction asne ibgOf.35 ...... Off Airbag Passenger CONTINUED
neirLgtDmigTm 105 ...... Time Dimming Light Interior o i rsue.62 ...... Pressure Oil Low
neirLgt 153 ...... Lights Interior o ul.66 ...... Fuel Low odLmt 257 ...... Limits Load
ntuetPnlBihns 122 ...... Brightness Panel Instrument e ImblzrSse).64 ...... System) (Immobilizer Key unSga 5 9,295 293, 65, ...... Signal Turn
INDEX ntuetPnl.61 ...... Panel Instrument ihBa 66 ...... Beam High akn 297 ...... Parking
sn AC 47 ...... LATCH Using ihs 66 ...... Lights) niao 61 ...... Indicator
ehrAcoaePit 50 ...... Points Anchorage Tether R DyieRunning (Daytime DRL ubRpaeet.291 ...... Replacement Bulb
ntligaCidSa 46 ...... Seat Child a Installing rieMi 66 ...... Main Cruise Lights
npcin ie.305 ...... Tire Inspection, hrigSse 62 ...... System Charging a/hudrBls.22 ...... Belts Lap/Shoulder
nieMro 145 ...... Mirror Inside ytm 63 ...... System) agaeSlcin.93 ...... Selection Language
nlto,Poe ie.303 ...... Tire Proper Inflation, rk PrigadBrake and (Parking Brake aeCag,Sgaig.120 ...... Signaling Change, Lane
NOKo 70 ...... Knob INFO B At-okBaeSse).66 . . System) Brake (Anti-lock ABS ae,Criiain.336 ...... Certification Label,
NOBto 70 ...... Button INFO niaos.61 ...... Indicators
L ehrAcoaePit 50 ...... Points Anchorage Tether motn aeyPeatos.8 ...... Precautions Safety Important
natSas.42 ...... Seats Infant moiie ytm.126 ...... System Immobilizer
natRsrit.42 ...... Restraint Infant iigCnrlSse 345 ...... System Control Timing es.125 ...... Keys
niaos ntuetPnl.62 ...... Panel Instrument Indicators, wth.127 ...... Switch cnwegmn 112 ...... Acknowledgement
S ytm.65 ...... System VSA es.125 ...... Keys els Lock Keyless
ciain.65 ...... Activation Ignition
K S VhceSaiiyAssist) Stability (Vehicle VSA dniiainNme,Vhce.336 . ... Vehicle Number, Identification
ann 65 ...... Warning
I unSga n Hazard and Signal Turn upSatn 319 ...... Starting Jump
ytmMsae.67 ...... Message System ak ie.313 ...... Tire Jack,
R 63 ...... SRS yrui lth.289 ...... Clutch Hydraulic akn pteVhce.314 ...... Vehicle the up Jacking
ieAra f 64 ...... Off Airbag Side on.5,118 ...... Horn
J euiySse 67 ...... System Security od pnn n lsn h 230 . .. the Closing and Opening Hood,
Index ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５４：４７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３６２ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５４：５３ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３６３
Index
LOCK (Ignition Key Position).... . 127 Manual Transmission Fluid...... 287 Change, When to...... 266 Locks Memory, Driving Position...... 142 Checking Engine...... 232 Anti-theft Steering Column...... 127 Memory Position Link...... 103 Pressure Indicator...... 62, 323 Childproof Door...... 129 Messages, System...... 76 Pressure Message...... 81 Fuel Fill Door...... 229 Meters, Gauges...... 68 Selecting Proper Viscosity Glove Box...... 158 Mirrors, Adjusting...... 146 Chart...... 279 Lockout Prevention...... 129 Modifications...... 235 ON (Ignition Key Position)...... 127 Power Door...... 128 Moonroof...... 150 Onboard Refueling Vapor Trunk...... 135 Closing Manually...... 327 Recovery...... 344 Low Coolant Level...... 232 Operation...... 150 Outside Mirrors...... 146 Low Fuel Indicator...... 66 Multi-Information Display...... 69 Outside Temperature...... 73 Lower Gear, Downshifting to a... . 242 Overheating, Engine...... 321 Low Oil Pressure Indicator...... 62 N Owner Maintenance Checks...... 273 Lubricant Specifications Chart... . 338 Luggage, Storing...... 236 Neutral Gear Position...... 245 P New Vehicle Break-in...... 228 M Normal Shift Speeds...... 243 Panel Brightness Control...... 122 NOTICE, Explanation of...... i Park Gear Position...... 245 Maintenance...... 263 Numbers, Identification...... 336 Parking Brake...... 151 Owner Maintenance Checks... . 273 Parking Brake and Brake System Main Items...... 274 O Indicator...... 63 Minder...... 266 Message...... 83 Record...... 275 Octane Requirement, Gasoline... . 228 Parking Lights...... 120 Safety...... 264 Odometer...... 68 Parking Over Things that Burn.. . 346 Malfunction Indicator Lamp. . 62, 324 Oil Parking Tips...... 251 Manual Transmission...... 342 Change, How to...... 280
VI
VII
edns oe 2,347 325, ...... Codes Readiness CONTINUED
oain ie.306 ...... Tire Rotation, ytm.170 ...... System
etPsto eoy.142 ...... Memory Position Seat ees oku 243 ...... Lockout Reverse ai/DSound Radio/CD
etHaes.137 ...... Heaters Seat ees erPsto 245 ...... Position Gear Reverse aitrOehaig.321 ...... Overheating Radiator
INDEX ern a/hudrBl 22 . ... Belt Lap/Shoulder a Wearing etan,Cid.37 ...... Child Restraint,
R s uigPenny.19 ...... Pregnancy During Use eev ak oln 283 ...... Coolant Tank, Reserve
ytmCmoet 21 ...... Components System rs 24 ...... Crash
epr.2,62 21, ...... Beeper elcn etBlsAtra After Belts Seat Replacing sn ose et.53 ...... Seat Booster Using
eidrIdctrand Indicator Reminder ie lds.301 ...... Blades Wiper rtcigLre hlrn.52 ...... Children Larger Protecting
aneac 24 ...... Maintenance ie 306 ...... Tires hlrn.42 ...... Children
a/hudrBl 22 ...... Belt Lap/Shoulder idr.266 ...... Minder rtcigIfnsadSmall and Infants Protecting
laig.299 ...... Cleaning ih ub 291 ...... Bulbs Light rtcigCide 37 ...... Children Protecting
esoes.23 ...... Tensioners ue 330 ...... Fuses diefrPenn oe 19 ...... Women Pregnant for Advice
uoai etBelt Seat Automatic nieOladFle 280 ...... Filter and Oil Engine diinlSft rcuin 20 . ... Precautions Safety Additional
diinlIfrain.21 ...... Information Additional elcmn Information Replacement rtcigAut n en 13 ...... Teens and Adults Protecting
etBls.10 ...... Belts Seat eoeKyMsae.79 ...... Message Key Remove rmr ipSlcin.101 ...... Selection Disp Primary
aelt iia ai 179 ...... Radio Digital Satellite eoeTasitr.130 ...... Transmitter Remote rgac,UigSa et 19 ...... Belts Seat Using Pregnancy,
aeyMsae ii ...... Messages Safety eidrIdctr 62 ...... Indicators Reminder oe idw 147 ...... Windows Power
aeyLbl,Lcto f.57 . of Location Labels, Safety ...... ees akn ee esg 78 . .. Message Lever Parking Release oe oktLctos.156 ...... Locations Socket Power
etBls.10 ...... Belts Seat eomne hf pes.242 ...... Speeds Shift Recommended oe orLc 128 ...... Lock Door Power
ibg 11 ...... Airbags elnn h etBcs.138 ...... Backs Seat the Reclining olnFle 300 ...... Filter Pollen
aeyFaue 9 ...... Features Safety erWno eogr.123 ...... Defogger Window Rear G-ISse 345 ...... System PGM-FI
aeyDfcs eotn 352 ...... Reporting Defects, Safety erVe irr.145 ...... Mirror View Rear esg 81 ...... Message
aeyBls.10 ...... Belts Safety erSa,Flig.140 ...... Folding Seat, Rear niao 64 ...... Indicator
ubRpaeet.25 296 295, ...... Replacement Bulb asne ieAra Off Airbag Side Passenger
S erLights, Rear asne ibgOfIdctr.35 . .... Indicator Off Airbag Passenger
Index ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５４：５７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３６４ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５５：０６ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３６５
Index
Seats, Adjusting the...... 138 Spare Tire Steam Coming from Engine...... 321 Security System...... 203 Inflating...... 312 Steering Wheel Indicator...... 67 Specifications...... 340 Adjustment...... 124 Security Relock Timer...... 114 Specifications Charts...... 338 Anti-theft Column Lock...... 12 Selecting a Child Seat...... 45 Speed Limiter...... 243, 249 Storing Your Vehicle...... 310 Select/Reset Button...... 72 Speedometer...... 68 Sun Visor...... 152 Serial Number...... 336 Spotlights...... 153 Sunglasses Holder...... 158 Service Manual...... 353 SRS, Additional Information...... 25 Supplemental Restraint Service Station Procedure...... 229 Additional Safety Precautions... . 36 System...... 11, 25 Setting the Clock...... 202 Airbag Service...... 35 Servicing...... 35 Sequential SportShift Mode...... 246 How Your SRS Indicator SRS Indicator...... 34, 63 Shift Lever Position Indicator...... 244 Works...... 34 System Components...... 25 Shift Lock Release...... 249 How Your Front Airbags Synthetic Oil...... 279 Side Airbags...... 11, 32 Work...... 28 System Message Indicator...... 67 How Your Side Airbags Work... . 32 How Your Side Airbags How the Side Airbag Off Work...... 32 T Indicator Works...... 34 SRS Components...... 25 Side Curtain Airbags...... 11, 33 SRS Service...... 35 Tachometer...... 68 How Your Side Curtain SRS Indicator...... 34, 63 Taillights, Changing Bulbs in...... 295 Airbags Work...... 33 Message...... 82 Taking Care of the Unexpected. . 311 Side Marker Lights, Bulb START (Ignition Key Position).. . 127 Technical Descriptions Replacement in...... 294, 295 Starting the Engine...... 241 DOT Tire Quality Grading...... 341 Signaling Turns...... 120 In Cold Weather at High Emissions Control Systems...... 344 Snow Tires...... 307 Altitude...... 241 Three Way Catalytic Sound System...... 175 With a Dead Battery...... 319 Converter...... 346 State Emissions Testing...... 347 Temperature Gauge...... 68
VIII ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５５：１２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３６６
Index
Temperature, Inside Sensor...... 169 Equipment and Accessories.... . 259 Uniform Tire Quality Grading.... . 341 Temperature, Outside...... 73 Weight Limit...... 257 Unleaded Gasoline...... 228 Tether Anchorage Points...... 50 Transmission Upholstery Cleaning...... 299 Three Way Catalytic Converter.. . 346 Checking Fluid Level, Used Oil, How to Dispose of...... 281 Tighten Fuel Cap Message...... 79 Automatic...... 285 Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel. . 124 Checking Fluid Level, V Time, Setting the...... 202 Manual...... 287 Tire Chains...... 308 Fluid Selection...... 286, 287, 288 Vanity Mirror...... 152 Tire, How to Change a Flat...... 313 Identification Number...... 336 Vehicle Capacity Load...... 237 Tire Labeling...... 343 Shifting the Automatic...... 244 Vehicle Dimensions...... 338 Tires...... 302 Shifting the Manual...... 242 Vehicle Identification Number.... . 336 Air Pressure...... 304 Treadwear...... 341 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) Chains...... 308 Trip A & AVG. Fuel Reset with System...... 255 Checking Wear...... 305 Refuel...... 97 Activation Indicator...... 255 Compact Spare...... 312 Trip Meter...... 72 Message...... 81 DOT Tire Quality Grading...... 341 Trunk...... 135 Off Switch...... 256 Inflation...... 303 Emergency Opener...... 136 System Indicator...... 255 Inspection...... 305 Main Switch...... 136 Vehicle Storage...... 310 Replacing...... 306 Opening the...... 135 VIN...... 336 Rotating...... 306 Open Monitor...... 78 Viscosity, Oil...... 279 Snow...... 307 Turn Signals...... 120 Specifications...... 338 W Tools, Tire Changing...... 313 U INDEX Towing WARNING, Explanation of...... ii A Trailer...... 257 Unexpected, Taking Care of Emergency Wrecker...... 328 the...... 311 CONTINUED
IX ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５５：１５ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３６７
Index
Warning Labels, Location of...... 57 Warranty Coverages...... 351 Washer, Windshield Checking the Fluid Level...... 282 Fluid Low Message...... 80 Operation...... 119 Wheels Adjusting the Steering...... 124 Alignment and Balance...... 305 Compact Spare...... 312 Wrench...... 313 Windows Auto Reverse...... 148 Operating the Power...... 147 Rear, Defogger...... 123 Windshield Cleaning...... 119 Defroster...... 123 Washers...... 119 Wipers, Windshield Changing Blades...... 301 Operation...... 119 Worn Tires...... 305 Wrecker, Emergency Towing...... 328
X ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５５：１７ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３６８ ０５／０９／２２ ０９：５５：３２ ３１ＳＥＡ６２０ ０３６９
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: 6-speed Manual Transmission Tire Pressure (measured cold): Premium unleaded gasoline, Fluid: Front: pump octane number of 91 or Honda Manual Transmission 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) higher. Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30 Rear: or 10W-40 motor oil as a 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) Fuel Tank Capacity: temporary replacement (see page Compact Spare Tire: 17.1 US gal (64.7 ) 287). 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) Capacity: Recommended Engine Oil: 2.1 US qt (2.0 ) API Premium grade 5W-30 detergent oil (see page278 ). Power Steering Fluid: Honda Power Steering Fluid Oil change capacity (including preferred, or another brand of filter): power steering fluid as a 4.4 US qt (4.2 ) temporary replacement. Do not use ATF (see page290 ). Automatic Transmission Fluid: Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Brake Fluid: Transmission Fluid) preferred, or Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid aDEXRON III ATF as a DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or temporary replacement (see page DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary 268). replacement (see page288 ).